SECTION 12J-2 - HIGH SERIES BODY

CONTROL MODULE

CAUTION:

This vehicle will be equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). A SRS will

consist of either seat belt pre-tensioners and a driver's side air bag , or seat belt pre-

tensioners and a driver's and front passenger's side air bags. Refer to CAUTIONS,

Section 12M, before performing any service operation on, or around any SRS

components, the steering mechanism or wiring. Failure to follow the CAUTIONS

could result in SRS d eployment, resultin g in po ssible personal in jury or unnecessary

SRS system repairs.

CAUTION:

This vehicle may be equipped with LPG (Liquefied Petroleum Gas). In the interests of

safety, the LPG fuel system should be isolated by turning 'OFF' the manual service

valve an d then draining t he LPG service lines, befo re any service w ork is carried out

on the vehicle. Refer to the LPG leaflet included with the Owner's Handbook for

details or LPG Section 2 for more specific servicing information.

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTI ON

A Body Control Module (BCM) combines into one central module, the control or assist of various vehicle electrical

systems or features, rather than having individual modules for each system or feature.

High Series Australian Arrow BCM’s are fitted as standard equipment on all VT Series Berlina and Calais Models.

NOTE:

Two levels of High Series Australian Arrow BCM’s have been released, a LUX level for Berlina Models and the HI

level for Calais. If a service operation or diagnostic procedure requires that a High Series BCM must be replaced,

ensure that the correct BCM level is reinstalled for the particular level of vehicle.

Figure 12J-2-1 illustrates the identification details for the High Series BCM. External identification can be made by

referring to the last three digits of the BCM part number.

Specific TECH 2 software has been developed f or use with the TECH 2 diagnostic scan tool to assist with various

vehicle electrical system fault finding, including the various BCM functions and controls.

The connection for TECH 2 for the High Series Australian Arrow BCM serial data communication is via the Data

Link Connector (DLC), attached to the instrument panel lower right hand trim, to the left of the steering column,

refer Fig.12J-2-2.

The Australian Arrow High Series BCM is located beneath the instrument cluster, to the right of the steering column,

refer to Fig. 12J-2-2.

Techline

Figure 12J-2-1

BODY CONTROL MODULE FEATURES

BCM FEATURE LEVEL 2 (BERLINA)

LUX - 687 LEVEL 3 (CALAIS)

HI - 685

Central door locking A A

Boot release with speed interlock A A

Power window system A A

Power antenna control A A

Dome lamp delay control A A

Rear lamp failure warning lamp control N/A A

Road speed dependent and variable

dwell wiper control - front AA

Intermittent and synchronised to front

rear wiper control with full wipe in

reverse gear (wagon only)

AN/A

Speed sensitive power steering N/A A

Instrument dimming control A A

Automatic lights OFF (variable) A A

Automatic lights ON - twilight sentinel N/A A

Engine disable A A

Alarm A A

Engine cooling low speed fan control A A

Priority key system N/A A

Cruise control interface A A

SRS (air bag) deployment vehicle

shutdown AA

Serial data interface A A

N/A = NOT AVAILABLE

A = AVAILABLE

Figure 12J-2-2

HIGH SERIES BCM TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

YB176 CONNECTOR 4

NO. DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT WIRE

COLOUR CIRCUIT TYPE

A1 EARTH (ELECTRONIC) 155 B/Y E

A2 INSTRUMENT ILLUMINATION

OUTPUT 8GYO

A3 THEFT DETERRENT HORN

OUTPUT 1128 B/W O

A4 HORN OUTPUT 28 B/Y 0

A5 BATTERY POSITIVE 740 O/B P

A6 THEFT DETERRENT LED

OUTPUT 263 LBLU O

A7 NC

A8 REAR WIPER OUTPUT 492 GY/BLU O

YB174 CONNECTOR 2

NO. DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT WIRE

COLOUR CIRCUIT TYPE

B1 WIPER OUTPUT 90 BR O

B2 POWER WINDOW OUTPUT 173 Y O

B3 PRIORITY KEY ONE OUTPUT 782 V O

B4 LEFT INDICATOR OUTPUT 14 LBLU O

B5 INDICATOR POWER 140 O/R P

B6 NC

B7 LOW FAN SPEED OUTPUT 473 O/B O

B8 WIPER PARK INPUT 196 Y PD/O

B9 NC

B10 POWER EARTH 151 B/G E

B11 DOOR LOCK POWER 440 O/V P

B12 RIGHT INDICATOR OUTPUT 15 BLU O

YB173 CONNECTOR 1

NO. DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT WIRE

COLOUR CIRCUIT TYPE

C1 WINDOW POWER INPUT 1240 O/Y P

C2 WINDOW MOTOR OUTPUT 673 G/O O

C3 DRIVERS DOOR UNLOCK

OUTPUT 293 BLU/B O

C4 ANTENNA DRIVE OUTPUT 145 G O

C5 DOME ON INPUT 175 V PD

C6 BOOT LAMP INPUT 162 B/G PPU

C7 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR

INPUT 125 W PPU

C8 DRIVERS DOOR AJAR INPUT 126 GY/W PPU

C9 PASSENGERS DOOR

UNLOCK INPUT 194 BR/O PU

C10 NC

C11 NC

C12 DEADLOCK OUTPUT 394 V/W O

C13 ALL DOORS, LOCK OUTPUT 295 B/Y O

C14 WINDOW DOWN INPUT 167 G/B PD

C15 STOP/TAIL SENSE INPUT 1251 BR/W I

C16 WINDOW UP INPUT 672 BLU/W PD

C17 ANTENNA DIRECTION

OUTPUT 954 GY O

C18 NC

C19 DOME - DOOR INPUT 722 Y/BLU PD

C20 UNLOCK INPUT 193 LG/Y PPU

C21 LOCK INPUT 195 BR/R PPU

C22 DEADLOCK REQUEST

INPUT 197 BR/W PPU

C23 NC

C24 DOME LAMP OUTPUT 174 W/G O

C25 BOOT OUTPUT 142 R/G O

C26 PASSENGER DOOR

UNLOCK OUTPUT 294 B/R O

YB175 CONNECTOR 3

NO. DESCRIPTION CIRCUIT WIRE

COLOUR CIRCUIT TYPE

E1 SLIP RING 229 V/R I/O

E2 SERIAL DATA INTERFACE

MAIN BUS 1221 R/B I/O

E3 AIRBAG SERIAL DATA

INTERFACE BUS 1220 G/W I/O

E4 POWER STEERING

SOLENOID OUTPUT 556 B/LG O

E5 WIPER DWELL INPUT 96 GY/B PU

E6 NC

E7 RECEIVER EARTH 271 BR/G E

E8 RECEIVER DATA 266 Y I

E9 SERIAL DATA INTERFACE

AUXILIARY BUS 1220 G/W I/O

E10 TWILIGHT INPUT (AMBIENT

LIGHT SENSOR) 272 Y/B I

E11 INSTRUMENT DIMMER

INPUT 717 W PU

E12 AUTO LIGHTS EARTH

OUTPUT 308 W/R O

E13 ANTENNA DOWN INPUT 160 W PPU

E14 ANTENNA UP INPUT 161 LBLU PPU

E15 REAR WASHER INPUT 494 W/BLU PD

E16 RADIO ON INPUT 143 Y/R PD

E17 ACCESSORIES INPUT 43 Y PD, P

E18 STOP LAMP FUSE INPUT 640 O/BLU PD

E19 REAR WIPER INPUT 1391 GY/R PD

E20 IGNITION INPUT 39 P/B PD, P

E21 BONNET SWITCH INPUT 261 R/W PPU

E22 BOOT RELEASE INPUT 1144 B/R PPU

E23 BONNET SWITCH INPUT 260 Y/B PD

E24 PARK LAMP FUSE INPUT 840 O/W PD

E25 FRONT SCREEN

WASH/WIPE INPUT 94 LBLU PU

E26 CRUISE CONTROL ON

INPUT 83 GY PD

E27 FRONT SCREEN

INTERMITTEN T AUTO WIPE

INPUT

97 BLU/W PD

E28 LIGHTS OFF EARTH

OUTPUT 1150 B O

GLOSSARY

E – Earth O – Output P - Power

PU - Pull up PPU - Pulsed pull up PD - Pull down

I – Input I/O - Input / Output NC - No circuit

B - Black W - White R - Red P - Pink

O - Orange Y - Yellow V - Violet BLU - Blue

G - Green LG - Light green BR - Brown GY - Grey

T - Tan LBLU - Light blue DKBLU - Dark blue

1.1 SE RIAL DATA COMMUNICATION (BUS MASTER)

GENERAL INFORMATION

The VT Series Model uses a BUS MASTER communication system, where the BCM is the bus master.

The BCM periodically polls (surveys) each device on the bus and requests status data.

The devices connected to the bus are:

• Body Control Module (BCM)

• Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

• Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

• Instrument cluster (INS)

• Antilock Brake/Electronic Traction Control System (ABS/ETC)

• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

• External diagnostic tool (TECH 2)

The data provided by each device may be utilised by any device connected to the bus.

Each device has a unique response Message Identifier Word (MIW) for ease of identification.

The bus master (BCM) polls each control module with a serial data message which includes that control modules

MIW. The polled control module responds by putting a serial data message onto the bus which includes its own

MIW and data, which is retrieved and utilised by any control module requiring it.

The BCM polls each device for a status update, once every 300 milliseconds. The exception to this being the PCM

which is polled twice every 300 milliseconds.

When the ignition switch is turned from the OFF position to the ON position, the BCM will communicate with the

PCM for antitheft purposes. If the BCM does not receive a message OK TO START from the PCM within 0.5

seconds of the ignition being switched on, the auxiliary bus is isolated via switching within the BCM.

The isolation of the auxiliary data bus during this period eliminates the possibility of a device failure other than the

BCM or PCM causing a problem on the bus and inhibiting antitheft communications.

This period is known as ‘Short Loop Time’, continues until the PCM responds with an acknowledgment or a

maximum period of 5 seconds, after which the BCM will switch to the standard poling sequence.

Following successful antitheft communications, the BCM begins sequential polling of devices on the bus and normal

system operation is established.

When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the BCM continues to poll, allowing for TECH 2 communications

and external control of the bus prior to the ignition being switched on.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

INPUTS / OUTPUTS

SERIAL DATA SIGNAL - MAIN

BCM terminal E2, serial data signal - main, refer Fig. 12J-2-3, is connected to the PCM and DLC via circuit 1221

(Red/Black wire). It is via this line that the BCM communicates with the PCM and external devices connected to the

DLC, at all times.

SERIAL DATA SIGNAL - AUXILIARY

BCM terminals E9 and E3, serial data signal - auxiliary, refer Fig. 12J-2-3, is connected to the INS, ABS/ETC and

SRS modules via circuit 1220 (Green/White wire). It is via this line that the BCM communicates with these devices,

after successful anti theft communications between the PCM and BCM (via the serial data - main line when the

ignition switch is turned from the OFF to ON position).

During anti theft communications, the serial data - auxiliary line is isolated from the serial data - main line via

switching within the BCM, if the BCM does not receive an OK TO START message from the PCM within 0.5

seconds of the ignition being switched on.

INPUTS

IGNITION SWITCH ON INPUT SIGNAL

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition

switch and fuse F14 via circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire), Refer to Fig. 12J-2-4.

Figure 12J-2-3

Figure 12J-2-4

1.2 CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or to Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

The central door locking system provides for locking and unlocking of all doors and tailgate (station wagon models)

as well as enhanced locking or 'deadlock' (doors only).

The system incorporates the following functions:

1. 1. Door and tailgate locking activated via:

Driver's door lock actuator (mechanically linked to door interior snib and door latch).

Left hand front passenger’s door lock actuator (mechanically linked to interior snib button).

Driver’s door key barrel micro switches, which are also mechanically linked to the door latch, and therefore

linked to the actuators. VT Series Models require micro switch activation to force lock (and unlock) without

moving the actuator.

Pressing the lock button on remote coded key (provided all doors are closed).

2. 2. Door and tailgate unlocking via:

All door lock actuators (mechanically linked to door interior snib).

Micro switch in driver’s door.

Pressing the unlock button on remote coded key.

The driver’s door key barrel can also be moved independently of the actuator, allowing unlocking of the driver’s

door latch in the case where the actuator is stuck down, ie. deadlock when the battery is discharged.

3. Single and Two Stage Unlocking

The BCM is capable of operating in either of two unlock modes, either two or single stage unlock. The BCM, as

fitted to the vehicle is programmed to operate the central door locking system in the two stage unlock mode.

TWO STAGE UNLOCK

In the two stage unlock mode, when the remote coded key unlock button is depressed for 0.25 seconds, the BCM,

on receiving the unlock request from the remote coded key, via the remote receiver, will unlock the driver’s door

only. If the remote coded key unlock button is depressed again for 0.25 seconds the BCM, on receiving the second

unlock request from the remote coded key, will unlock all passenger doors.

Or alternatively, if the remote coded key is depressed continuously for 0.5 seconds, the BCM, on receiving the

unlock request from the remote coded key, will unlock all doors, first the driver’s door, then all passenger doors.

SINGLE STAGE UNLOCK

In single stage unlock mode, when the remote coded key unlock button is depressed for 0.25 seconds or longer,

the BCM on receiving the unlock request from the remote coded key, via the remote receiver, will unlock all doors

simultaneously.

With TECH 2, the BCM can be programmed to operate in either two stage or single stage unlock (depending on the

vehicle’s owner or operator requirements).

If a short circuit exists on either the lock or unlock signal inputs, the opposing input is still able to perform its

function. This enables the doors to be unlocked when a short circuit exists on the lock input or vice-versa.

To protect the motors used in the door and tailgate lock actuators, in the event of multiple activation's within a

defined time period, the system will 'time-out' and protect the motors from damage. After a fixed time delay, the

system will re-activate as normal.

The deadlock feature provides for mechanical jamming of the door lock actuators. This is achieved electrically via

the driver's door key barrel micro-switch.

NOTE:

Deadlock is inhibited whilst the ignition is switched ON.

Operation of the Central Door Locking System is also affected by the Theft Deterrent System, refer to 1.3 THEFT

DETERRENT SYSTEM in this Section.

SYSTEM CHECK

The operation of the Central Door Locking System

is independent of the ignition being switched ON or

OFF.

Figure 12J-2-5 shows the key positions on the

driver’s door for the various key locking functions.

Deadlock refers to the electrical m eans that c an be

activated to ensure vehicle security by inhibiting

door lock operation.

Even though the electronic theft deterrent system,

via the remote coded key, can activate the door

locks, it does not engage the electrical 'block ing' of

the doors (deadlocking).

Figure 12J-2-5

CENTRAL LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Operation of this system can be effected as

follows;

1. Driver’s door, outside key and inside locking

(snib) button.

2. Left hand front passenger door inside locking

(snib) button (locking and unlocking)

3. Rear passenger doors inside locking (snib)

button (only unlocking is possible).

DEADLOCK

The deadlocking feature applies to all four doors,

but not to the luggage compartment lid or tailgate.

After the deadlocking feature device has been

engaged, unlocking is possible at the driver’s door

from outside, by inserting the key into the driver’s

door lock c ylinder and turning the k ey to the unlock

position or activating the unlock button on the

rem ote key unlocks the deadlocks on all doors, but

only unlocks the driver’s door (only if 2 stage

unlocking has been enabled).

To ensure access to the vehicle if the electrical

system should fail (discharged battery), after the

system has been engaged, the driver’s door key

barrel can be m oved independently of the actuator

and therefore allowing unlocking of the driver’s

door latch.

The rear compartment lid or tailgate can be

locked/unlocked with the key when the mechanical

deadlocking feature is actuated, while leaving the

doors secured. However, if the theft deterrent

system has been activated, the alarm will sound

when the rear compartment lid is raised (sedans

only).

NOTE:

Deadlocking is not possible with the ignition on.

REMOTE CODED KEY CHECK

Check that the BCM locks all doors when the

remote coded key lock button is pressed, at a

distance within 4 metres from the driver’s side B

pillar.

When the remote coded key unlock button is

pressed the driver's side should unlock (vehicles

programmed for two stage unlock). Pressing the

unlock button again and all passenger doors (and

tailgate on station wagon models) should be

unlocked.

On vehicles programmed for single stage unlock,

the single press of the unlock button will unlock all

doors and tailgate on station wagon models.

If this test does not prove satisfactory, refer to

2.3 REMOTE CODED KEY in this Section for a

more detailed diagnosis before continuing with the

central locking system check.

Figure 12J-2-6

CHECKING THE DEADLOCK FEATURE

Open all windows.

Close all doors.

Actuate the deadlock feature f rom the dr iver’s door

with the key.

Check that all door lock buttons cannot be pulled

up. They are electrically blocked.

NOTE:

The door lock (snib) buttons can be pulled up

slightly, but they will be under tension.

OVERHEATING PREVENTION

In the event of multiple activations within a defined

time period, the central door locking system will be

deactivated and remain inoperative for a defined

time period to prevent the door actuators from

overheating. After a fixed time delay, the system

will re-activate and operate as normal.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

The door and tailgate locks are operated by reversible motors that receive voltage from relays within the BCM.

These relays operate the motors by applying battery voltage to one side of each motor and earth to the other side.

The central door locking system has four operational phases as follows:

1. Lock to Unlock

2. Unlock to Lock

3. Lock to Deadlock

4. Deadlock to Unlock

The circuit operation of each of these four phases is described as follows:

LOCK TO UNLOCK OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-10)

DRIVER’S DOOR REQUEST UNLOCK INPUT SIGNAL

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-7)

When unlocking the doors and tailgate via the right hand front door lock cylinder barrel microswitch or interior snib

button, BCM terminal C20 (driver's door request unlock signal), is connected to earth by the driver’s door lock

actuator switch contacts changing position from terminals 4-5 to 3-5 or in the case of the driver’s door cylinder

barrel micro switch, C20 is connected to earth via the microswitch contacts, unlock position circuit 156 (Black/Blue

wire). This action causes the voltage on terminal C20, circuit 193 (Light Green/Yellow wire), to be pulled low, less

than 0.2 volt (Driver’s door unlocked). This low voltage at terminal C20 is seen by the BCM as a driver’s door

request unlock signal.

NOTE:

Manually activating any unlock request line will cause all doors to be unlocked.

Figure 12J-2-7

PASSENGER DOOR UNLOCK REQUEST INPUT SIGNAL

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-8)

When unlocking the doors via any passenger door interior snib button, BCM terminal C9 (passenger door unlock

request signal) is connected to earth by the activated passenger door lock actuator switch contacts, terminals 3,

circuit 194 (Brown/Orange wire) and 5, circuit 156 (Black/Blue wire). This action causes the voltage on terminal C9,

circuit 194 to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (doors unlocked). This low voltage at terminal C9 is seen by the BCM

as a passenger door unlock request signal.

A low voltage at terminal C20 or C9 is seen by the BCM as a system unlock request. This then enables the BCM to

energise the internal unlock relays for approximately 0.75 seconds. This causes the unlock relay contacts to close

and battery voltage is applied, via fuse F20, circuit 440 (Orange/Violet wire) and BCM terminals B11 and C26, to

terminal 2 of each of the passenger door lock actuators and to the tailgate lock actuator (station wagon models),

circuit 294 (Black/Red wire). Battery voltage is also applied, via fuse F20, circuit 440 (Orange/Violet wire) and BCM

terminals B11 and C3, to terminal 2 of the driver’s door lock actuator, via circuit 293 (Blue/Black wire).

The opposite terminal of the door lock actuators (terminal 1) is connected to earth via BCM terminal C12, circuit 394

(Violet/White wire) through the BCM internal deadlock relay contacts and BCM terminal B10, circuit 151

(Black/Green wire). This causes the door lock actuator motor armatures to rotate from the lock to the unlock

position, and the door lock actuator switch contacts to change from terminal 1 to 6. The rotation of the passenger

door lock actuator motor armatures also causes the door lock switch contacts to change from the lock to the unlock

position. The tailgate lock actuator motors are earthed via the BCM terminal C13, circuit 295 (Black/Yellow wire),

through the BCM internal lock relay contacts and BCM terminal B10 and circuit 151 (Black/Green wire).

REMOTE CODED KEY OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-9 for the remote receiver/key, Fig. 12J-2-11 for first stage of two stage unlock and Fig. 12J-2-12

for the second stage of two stage unlock)

TWO STAGE UNLOCK

If the BCM is operating in the two stage unlock mode and the remote coded key unlock button is depressed for 0.25

seconds, the BCM, on receiving the unlock request from the remote coded key, via remote receiver, activates the

microprocessor within the BCM, causing the driver’s door unlock relay to toggle to the unlock state, unlocking the

driver’s door only as described previously.

If the remote coded key unlock button is depressed again for 0.25 seconds, the microprocessor within the BCM, on

receiving the second unlock request from the remote coded key, will toggle the unlock relay contacts to the unlock

state and the passenger doors (and tailgate) will unlock as described previously.

If the remote coded key is depressed continuously for 0.5 seconds, the microprocessor within the BCM, on

receiving the unlock request from the remote coded key will unlock all doors, first the driver’s door, then all

passenger doors (and tailgate), as described previously.

SINGLE STAGE

If the BCM is operating in the single stage unlock mode and the remote coded key unlock button is depressed for

0.25 seconds, the microprocessor within the BCM, on receiving the RF unlock request from the remote coded key,

causes the unlock relay contacts to toggle to the unlock state, all doors (and tailgate) will then unlock as described

previously.

Figure 12J-2-9

Figure 12J-2-10

Figure 12J-2-11

Figure 12J-2-12

UNLOCK TO LOCK OPERATION

(Refer to Fig.12J-2-15)

LOCK REQUEST

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-13)

When locking the doors and tailgate via the driver’s or front passenger’s door interior snib button, the BCM terminal

C21, circuit 195 (Brown/Red wire), is connected to earth, circuit 156 (Black/Blue wire) by the driver’s or front

passenger’s door lock actuator key switch contacts changing over from terminals 3-5 to 4-5.

This action causes the voltage on terminal C12, circuit 195 (Brown/Red wire), to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt

(doors locked).

This low voltage at terminal C21 is seen by the BCM as the system lock request.

LOCK AND DEADLOCK REQUEST

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-14)

When locking the doors and tailgate via the driver’s door cylinder barrel microswitch, BCM terminal C22

(lock/deadlock request signal) is connected to earth via the microswitch contacts, lock position, circuit 156

(Black/Blue wire). This action causes the voltage on terminal C22, circuit 197 (Brown/White wire) to be pulled low,

less than 0.2 volt (door locked). This low voltage at terminal C22 is seen by the BCM as the system lock request

(only if driver’s door is closed).

Either of these lock requests, via driver’s or front passenger’s snib buttons and driver’s door microswitch, then

enable the BCM to energise the internal lock relay for approximately 0.75 seconds, the lock relay contacts close and

battery voltage is applied, via fuse F20, circuit 440 (Orange/Violet wire) and BCM terminals B11 and C13, to

terminal 6 of each door lock actuator and to the tailgate actuator, circuit 295 (Black/Yellow wire).The opposite

terminal (terminal 2) of the passenger doors and tailgate door lock actuator motors is connected to earth through

BCM terminal C26, circuit 294 (Black/Red wire), the internal unlock relay contacts and through BCM terminal B10 to

earth, circuit 151 (Black/Green wire). The opposite terminal (terminal 2) of the driver’s door lock actuator motor is

connected to earth through BCM terminal C3, circuit 293 (Blue/Black wire), the internal driver’s door unlock relay

contacts and through BCM terminal B10 to earth, circuit 151 (Black/Green wire).

This allows the door lock actuator motor armatures to rotate to the lock position and causes the door lock actuator

switch contacts to change from terminals 6 to 1. This action disconnects the voltage supply to the door lock actuator

motor armatures, the armatures now have earth connection on both sides, with actuator terminals 6 earthed

through the deadlock relay terminals and through BCM terminal B10 to earth circuit 151 (Black/Green wire). This

causes an instantaneous halt to door lock actuator motor armature rotation.

This rotation of the passenger door lock actuator motor armatures also causes the passenger door lock switch

contacts to change to the lock position.

After approximately 0.75 seconds, the power to all the actuators via BCM terminal C13 circuit 295 (Black/Yellow

wire) is disconnected by the opening of the internal lock relay contacts.

REMOTE CODED KEY OPERATION

When locking the doors via the remote coded key, the RF output signal from the key (via remote receiver) activates

the microprocessor within the BCM, causing the door lock relay to be energised locking all doors (and tailgate) as

described previously. If any door does not lock either BCM terminal C20 (driver’s door request unlock) or C9

(Unlock request) will remain low, this low voltage is seen by the BCM as an unsuccessful attempt to lock all doors

and the BCM will cause the theft deterrent horns to sound momentarily (driver’s door must be closed).

Figure 12J-2-13

Figure 12J-2-14

Figure 12J-2-15

UNLOCK TO DEADLOCK OPERATION

(Refer to Fig.12J-2-17)

LOCK / DEADLOCK REQUEST INPUT SIGNAL

(Refer to Fig.12J-2-16)

Deadlocking is activated after two sequential lock activation’s of the driver’s door lock switch. This action causes the

micro-switch contacts to change to the lock position. This connects BCM terminal C22 circuit 197 (Brown/White

wire) to earth via circuit 156 (Black/Blue wire), causing the voltage on terminal C22 to be pulled low, less than 0.2

volt.

This low voltage at terminal C22 is seen by the BCM as the system deadlock request. This enables the BCM to

energise the internal lock and deadlock relays for approximately 0.75 seconds, the lock and deadlock relays

contacts close and battery voltage is applied, via fuse F20, circuit 440 (Orange/Violet wire) and BCM terminals B11,

C13 and C12, circuit 295 (Black/Yellow wire) and 394 (Violet/White wire) to terminals 6 and 1 of each electric door

lock motor.

The opposite terminal (terminal 2) of all the passenger lock actuator motors is connected to earth through BCM

terminal C26, the internal unlock relay contacts and through BCM terminal B10 to earth, circuit 151 (Black/Green

wire). Terminal 2 of the driver’s door lock actuator motors is connected to earth through BCM terminal C3, the

internal driver’s door unlock relay contacts and through BCM terminal B10 to earth, circuit 151 (Black/Green wire).

This causes the door lock actuator motor armatures to rotate in the locking (downward) direction into the deadlock

position. This rotation of the door lock actuator motor armatures also causes the door lock actuator switch contacts

to change from terminals 6 to 1 to 6.

NOTE 1: The tailgate actuator is not designed to go to deadlock.

NOTE 2: Unlock to deadlock operation will only work if the driver’s door is closed and the ignition is off. If driver’s

door is open, door will not lock. If ignition is on, door will not deadlock.

Figure 12J-2-16

Figure 12J-2-17

DEADLOCK TO UNLOCK OPERATION

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-18 and 12J-2-19)

When unlocking the doors from the deadlock position by the driver’s door lock cylinder barrel, by turning to the

unlock position, the microswitch contacts change to the unlock position. This connects BCM terminal C20 circuit

193 (Lt. Green/Yellow wire), to earth via circuit 156 (Black/Blue wire), causing the voltage at terminal C20 to be

pulled low, less than 0.2 volts.

This low voltage at terminal C20 is seen by the BCM as the driver’s door unlock request signal. This then enables

the BCM to energise the internal unlock relays for approximately 0.75 seconds. This causes the relay contacts to

toggle and battery voltage is applied, via fuse F20, circuit 440 (Orange/Violet wire) and BCM terminals B11, C26

and C3 (drivers door unlock, drive, circuit 293 (Blue/Black wire) passenger’s door unlock, drive, circuit 294

(Black/Red wire)) to terminals 2 of each of the door lock actuators and to the tailgate lock actuator, circuit 294

(Black/Red wire).

Figure 12J-2-18

Initially, actuator terminal 6 is connected to earth via circuit 295 (Black/Yellow wire) through the BCM terminal C13,

through the internal lock relay contacts to terminal B10 to circuit 151 (Black/Green wire). This then allows the

passenger door lock actuator motor armatures to rotate from the deadlock toward the unlock position, causing the

passenger door lock actuator switch contacts to change from terminal 6 to 1. As terminal 1 is connected to earth via

circuit 394 (Violet/White wire) through terminal C12 of the BCM, the deadlock relay contacts to terminal B10 to

circuit 151 (Black/Green wire), the door lock actuator motor armatures will continue to rotate further to the unlock

position.

This rotation of the passenger door lock actuator motor armatures causes the door lock actuator switch contacts to

change back to terminal 6. This rotation of the passenger door actuator lock motor armatures also causes the

passenger door lock switch contacts to change to the unlock position.

NOTE:

Provided the ignition is off, the doors may be unlocked from the deadlock position by activating the unlock button on

the remote key. If set for two stage unlock, the drivers door will fully unlock (deadlock to unlock) and the remaining

passenger doors will go from the deadlock position to the lock position. If set for single stage unlock, all doors will

go from the deadlock position to the unlock position.

Figure 12J-2-19

1.3 THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

The theft deterrent system on VT Series Models uses a remote coded key to arm and disarm the system, and

where fitted, electrically lock or unlock all doors and tailgate (station wagon), or operate the boot unlock mechanism

(sedan models).

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OPERATION

When enabled, there are two modes of theft deterrent operation, armed and disarmed.

Armed

Once the theft deterrent system is enabled, it can be manually armed in one of two ways:

Actively, by pressing the lock button on the remote coded key or,

Passively, as the BCM will automatically arm 30 seconds after the ignition is turned off.

Disarmed

With the system disarmed, the engine management control module is enabled, allowing the engine to be started

when the ignition switch is turned to the run position.

The theft deterrent system can be disarmed in three ways:

1. Pressing the unlock button on the remote coded key. This unlocks the doors, turns the interior dome lamp on

and fully disarms the system for 30 seconds or,

2. By inserting the remote coded key into the ignition switch key barrel and turning the ignition to the ON or RUN

position. This causes the BCM to read a security code serial data output from the remote coded key contact pin

via the remote coded key reader assembly.

3. The system can also be disarmed by turning the ignition switch to the ON position for approximately two hours.

NOTE:

Should the engine crank for a brief period then stop when the ignition switch is turned to the START position (ie.

due to mis-aligned or a faulty remote coded key reader), pressing the unlock button on the remote coded key will

also disarm the theft deterrent system.

The theft deterrent system has a timed override function. The theft deterrent system can be overridden (disabled),

as for example in the event of a remote coded key failure, by turning the ignition switch to the ON position for

approximately two hours. The theft deterrent alert indicator LED will go out once the sy stem has been disabled and

normal starting of the vehicle can take place.

REMOTE CODED KEY

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-20)

The theft deterrent system uses a remote coded key to arm and disarm the system, and electrically lock or unlock

all doors and tailgate (station wagon), or operate the boot unlock mechanism (sedan models).

The remote coded key is powered by its own internal battery. If its internal battery fails, the remote coded key can

be powered by the remote coded key reader once the key is inserted into the ignition switch key barrel and turned to

the IGN or START position.

The radio frequency transmitted by the remote key is received by the BCM remote receiver, located in the

instrument panel, between the demist ducts.

When the theft deterrent system is armed by pressing the remote coded key lock button, the indicators will flash

once and the theft deterrent alert indicator LED will begin to flash. Disarming the system by pressing the unlock

button will cause the indicators to flash twice and the theft deterrent alert indicator LED will stop flashing.

NOTE:

Passive arming of the system does not automatically operate the door locks or flash the indicators.

Figure 12J-2-20

THEFT DETERRENT ALERT INDICATOR LED

The theft deterrent alert indicator LED is used to indicate the state of the system. A flashing LED indicates that the

system is armed and consequently the vehicle cannot be started. When the LED is turned off, the BCM is disarmed

and the engine can be started.

On VT Series Models, the LED indicator is located in the trip computer switch facia.

OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-21)

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the BCM polls the PCM and sends an encrypted BCM/key

security code. The security code is received by the BCM, via the remote key reader (slip ring) or via the remote

receiver in the event of no slip ring communication.

The PCM compares the received security code with its stored security code and if matched, the PCM will continue

to enable injector fuelling and engine crank.

The PCM will return a Valid Code message (OK TO START), which tells the BCM to jump from the short loop mode

to the long loop mode.

Figure 12J-2-21

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-26)

BATTERY POWER

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-22)

Battery voltage is applied to the BCM microprocessor from terminal A5 at all times from fusible link FS and fuse F31

via circuit 740 (Orange/Black wire).

INDICATORS POWER

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-22)

Battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal B5 at all times from fusible link FQ and fuse F7 via circuit 140

(Orange/Red wire).

INPUTS

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-22)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition

switch and fuse F14 via circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-22

BCM and Engine Control Module Communication (Serial Data)

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-23 and 12J-2-24)

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and the BCM has received a correct security code from the

key or key reader, the BCM will transmit the security code to the PCM. The PCM will compare that code with its own

stored code. If the security codes are the same, the PCM will continue to enable engine starting and also give the

BCM a ‘Valid Code’ message (OK TO START).

The serial data from the remote coded key is applied to BCM terminal E1, circuit 229 (Violet/Red wire)

Figure 12J-2-23

Figure 12J-2-24

Driver's Door Jamb Switch

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-25)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the driver's front door is opened or closed. The BCM must sense that

the driver's door is closed before the theft deterrent system can be actively armed.

When the door is opened, the jamb switch earths terminal C8 via circuit 126 (Grey/White wire). This causes the

voltage at terminal C8 to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (driver's door open). This low voltage at terminal C8 is

seen by the BCM as the driver's door open input signal.

Figure 12J-2-25

OUTPUTS

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-26)

Left Hand Indicators

The BCM controls the operation of the left hand indicators by pulsing its internal indicator relay. This causes the

indicator relay contacts to close and open a number of times. This allows battery voltage from terminal B5 to be

applied internally to terminal B4, to the left hand indicator lamps via circuit 14 (Light Blue wire).

Right Hand Indicators

The BCM controls the operation of the right hand indicators in the same manner as the left hand indicators. Pulsing

of its internal indicator relay causes the indicator relay contacts to close and open a number of times. This allows

battery voltage from terminal B5 to be applied internally to terminal B12, to the right hand indicator lamps via circuit

15 (Blue wire).

Theft Deterrent Alert Indicator LED

The theft deterrent alert indicator LED will continuously flash on and off whenever the system is armed. The BCM

controls the operation of the theft deterrent alert indicator LED by pulsing an internal switch on and off, which in turn

switches the voltage applied to the theft deterrent alert indicator LED via terminal A6, circuit 263 (Light Blue wire).

Figure 12J-2-26

1.4 ENTRY DETERRENT SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

The entry deterrent system, incorporated in the BCM, is designed to deter unwanted access to the vehicle's

passenger compartment by providing audible and visual warning (alarm) of illegal entry to the vehicle.

Arming of the theft and entry deterrent systems is by pressing the lock button on the remote coded key.

NOTE:

The entry deterrent system does not arm passively.

The remote coded key also incorporates a boot release function button.

An ultrasonic sensor option can also be fitted to the vehicle.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

Arming Operation

The entry deterrent system is armed by pressing the lock button on the remote coded key, the output signal from

the key, via the remote receiver, activates the microprocessor within the BCM, providing that the ignition is OFF and

the vehicle road speed input indicates speed is zero. Note that one continuous press of a button on the remote

coded key should cause only one arm/disarm operation. It is not possible to arm the system or remote lock the

doors with the driver's door open.

When the system is armed, the following actions take place:

1. All doors lock (and tailgate on Berlina station wagon).

2. All indicator lamps flash once.

3. The power antenna retracts.

4. The power window system deactivates.

5. The dome lamp is switched off (provided it has not been turned on by another system).

6. The theft deterrent alert indicator LED flashes (refer theft deterrent system operation description).

Triggered Operation

Once the entry deterrent system is armed, it is triggered by any one of the following inputs:

1. The bonnet being opened (or ultrasonic trigger).

2. The boot being opened.

3. Any door being opened.

4. Ignition being switched on.

If any of the previous conditions exist at the time of the system arming, they will be ignored until the fault condition is

cleared.

Once triggered, the system will operate as follows:

1. Flash all indicator lamps at a rate of one flash every two seconds.

2. Pulse all vehicle horns at a rate of one pulse per second.

3. Flash the dome lamp at a rate of one flash every two seconds.

Flashing of the indicators and dome lamp, and sounding of the horn/s will continue for a period of 30 seconds.

Disarming Procedure

The system is disarmed by:

A. Pressing the unlock button on the remote coded key. The RF output signal from remote coded key, via the

remote receiver, activates the microprocessor within the BCM.

Upon disarming the following actions take place:

1. All doors (and tailgate on Berlina station wagon) unlock.

2. All indicators lamps flash twice, however if the system has been triggered since being armed, they will flash

three times.

3. The dome lamp is activated for 30 seconds (normal delay cancellation conditions apply).

4. If the system has been triggered since being armed, the theft deterrent alert indicator LED will flash a code

indicating the triggered source, otherwise it will be turned off. This flashing code will be cancelled once the

ignition is switched on.

B. If the remote coded key is not working (eg. flat battery), turning the ignition on allows the BCM to provide a

power supply to the remote coded key to enable reading of the key security code. (the alarm may trigger

briefly)

Flash Codes

The system triggered flash codes emitted by the theft deterrent alert indicator LED flash at a defined flash rate with

a pause between codes. Pause are 1.5 seconds. Codes are repeated twice before moving to the next code.

Two flashes - bonnet (or ultrasonic sensor)

Three flashes - boot

Four flashes - passenger door

Five flashes - driver's door

Six flashes - ignition on

NOTE:

Alarm codes are stored in the BCM until cleared (BCM reset). To access this information, connect TECH 2 to the

DLC and select Body / Body Control Module / Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read Alarm Code Information.

Remote Boot Release

The rear compartment lock actuator is controlled by pressing the boot button on the remote coded key. The RF

output signal from the remote coded key, via the remote receiver, activates the microprocessor within the BCM.

The rear compartment lock actuator is activated under the following conditions:

1. The boot button on the remote coded key has been pressed continuously for more than 0.5 seconds.

2. The vehicle road speed is less than or equal to fifteen kilometres per hour.

The remote boot release function also operates whilst the entry deterrent system is armed and the system will not

trigger from the remote opening of the boot. Whilst the boot input is inhibited, the bonnet input is similarly inhibited

against triggering the entry deterrent system (this is required for the operation of the ultrasonic sensor option).

After the boot has been closed for 30 seconds, the system will re-arm the boot and bonnet sensing to allow

triggering from the boot and bonnet.

Loss of Vehicle Battery Power

Whenever there is a re-connection of battery power to the BCM, the theft and entry deterrent systems will resume in

the same state as when the battery power was disconnected, except if the system was disarmed. If the system was

disarmed, it will default to passive arm.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-34)

Power Supplies

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-27)

Battery Power

Battery voltage is applied to the BCM microprocessor from terminal A5 at all times from fusible link FS and fuse F31

via circuit 740 (Orange/Black wire).

Turn Signal Power

Battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal B5 at all times from fusible link FQ and fuse F7 via circuit 140

(Orange/Red wire).

INPUTS

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-27)

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition

switch and fuse F14 via circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-27

Driver's Door Jamb Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-28)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the driver's front door is opened or closed. When the door is opened,

the jamb switch earth’s terminal C8 via circuit 126 (Grey/White wire). This causes the voltage at terminal C8 to be

pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (driver's door open). This low voltage at terminal C8 is seen by the BCM as the driver's

door open input signal.

Figure 12J-2-28

Passenger’s Door Jamb Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-29)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if any of the passenger doors are opened or if all passenger doors are

closed. If the right hand rear, left hand front or left hand rear door is open, terminal C7 is earthed through circuit 125

(White wire). This causes the voltage at terminal C7 to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (if any one of the passenger

doors is opened). This low voltage at terminal C7 is seen by the BCM as the passenger door open input signal.

Figure 12J-2-29

Bonnet Open Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-30)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the bonnet is open or closed. When the bonnet is closed, battery

voltage from the BCM, via circuit 261 (Red/White wire) passes through the bonnet switch, via circuit 260

(Yellow/Black wire) and is applied to the BCM terminal E23. This high voltage at the BCM terminal E23 is seen by

the BCM as the bonnet closed input signal. In the event of an open circuit in either circuits 260 or 261, the BCM

internal pull down resistor ensures that the voltage at the input to the microprocessor is less than 0.2 volts. This low

voltage at the microprocessor is seen as the bonnet open signal. This is to ensure that if either of these two circuits

are tampered with, the alarm will be triggered.

When the bonnet is opened, the theft deterrent bonnet open switch closes and earth’s the BCM terminal E23

through circuit 260 (Yellow/Black wire). This action causes the voltage at the BCM terminal E23 to be pulled low,

less than 0.2 volts (bonnet open). This low voltage at BCM terminal E23 is seen by the BCM as the bonnet open

input signal.

Figure 12J-2-30

Boot Lamp Switch Input Signal (Sedan Models Only)

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-31)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine if the boot is open or closed. When the boot is opened, the boot lamp

switch earth’s BCM terminal C6 through circuit 162 (Black/Green wire). This action causes the voltage at BCM

terminal C6 (Boot Open) to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt). This low voltage at BCM terminal C6 is seen by the

BCM as the boot open input signal.

Figure 12J-2-31

Vehicle Speed Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-32)

The BCM terminal E2, receives the vehicle speed from the PCM via the serial data communications bus, circuit

1221 (Red/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-32

Remote Coded Key RF Signals

When the lock, unlock or boot button on the remote coded key is pressed the remote coded key transmits a Radio

Frequency (RF) signal. The BCM, on receiving any of these RF signals (via remote receiver), determines from the

signal received which button was pressed.

Boot Release input Signals

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-33)

Pressing the rear compartment lock switch causes the contacts to close, connecting BCM terminal E22 to earth via

circuit 1144 (Black/Red wire). This action causes the voltage at terminal E22 to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt.

This low voltage at terminal E22 is seen by the BCM as the boot release switch input signal.

NOTE:

The BCM will not activate the rear compartment lock actuator if the vehicle speed is above fifteen kilometres per

hour.

Figure 12J-2-33

OUTPUTS

Theft Deterrent Alert Indicator LED

The theft deterrent alert indicator LED will flash continuously on and off whenever the system is armed. The BCM

controls the operation of the theft deterrent alert indicator LED by pulsing an internal switch on and off, which in turn

allows the switching of the voltage applied to the theft deterrent alert indicator LED via terminal A6, circuit 263 (Light

Blue wire ).

Dome Lamp

Battery voltage is applied to all interior lamps via fuse F6 and circuit 1140 (Orange/Black wire). The opposite side of

the dome lamps are connected to earth via circuit 174 (White/Green wire) and BCM terminal C24. The BCM

controls the operation of the dome lamps connected to this earth circuit by energising its internal dome lamp relay

coil, this causes the internal relay contacts to close completing the circuit to earth.

Horn Relay

The BCM can control the operation of the vehicle horn/s by pulsing the horn relay coil to earth through terminal A4,

circuit 28 (Black/Y ellow wire).

Theft Deterrent Horn Relay

The BCM controls the operation of the theft deterrent horn by pulsing the theft deterrent horn relay coil to earth

through terminal A3, circuit 1128 (Black/White wire). The same circuit in the BCM earth’s this circuit and the horn

circuit.

Left Hand Indicators

The BCM controls the operation of the left hand indicators by pulsing its internal indicator relay. This causes the

indicator relay contacts to close and open a number of times. This allows battery voltage from terminal B5 to be

applied to terminal B4, to the left hand indicator lamps via circuit 14 (Light Blue wire).

Right Hand Indicators

The BCM controls the operation of the right hand indicators in the same manner as the left hand indicators. Pulsing

of its internal indicator relay causes the indicator relay contacts to close and open a number of times. This allows

battery voltage from terminal B5 to be applied to terminal B12, to the right hand indicator lamps via circuit 15 (Blue

wire).

Rear Compartment Lock Actuator

The BCM can activate the rear compartment lock actuator by energising its internal boot release relay. This will

apply battery voltage from terminal B5, through the boot release relay contacts and terminal C25 to the rear

compartment release actuator, circuit 142 (Red/Green wire). The earth circuit for the rear compartment solenoid is

via the body and main wiring harness.

Figure 12J-2-34

1.5 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

The BCM controls the following functions of the power window system:

1. Control of positive supply to all door window motors.

2. Automatic down of driver's door window (activated when the driver's power window switch DOWN button is

depressed for more than 0.4 seconds).

Once activated, the automatic down feature is cancelled within 100 ms (0.1 seconds) after:

a. The driver's power window switch UP button is depressed following which the window will move upward or:

b. The driver's power window switch DOWN button is depressed and released. In this case, the window will

remain stationary until another activation (down or up button depressed) takes place.

c. With ignition on, power is supplied continuously to the window system.

d. When ignition is switched OFF and no door has been opened, power is supplied to the window system for a

maximum of 60 minutes.

e. In the event of any door being opened, power is supplied to the system for 45 seconds maximum, timed

from when any door was opened.

When the doors are remotely unlocked (by using the remote coded key) power is supplied to the system for 60

minutes and for a maximum of 45 seconds, once the door has been opened and the ignition has not been turned

ON. The delay is cancelled when the doors are locked by the remote coded key.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM CHECK

Prerequisite Condition

The child saf ety switch must be s witched O FF . T his

will be indicated by the green Light Emitting Diode

(LED) in each of the rear door rocker switches

being illuminated.

System Active

‘System active’ is indicated by the illumination of

the rocker switches.

W hen the ignition switch is turned ON, all switches

are active.

With the ignition switch turned OFF, all switches

will remain active for 45 seconds after any door is

opened. If during this 45 second per iod the driver’s

window switch is activated, the active period will be

extended a further 45 seconds.

With the ignition switch turned OFF, all switches

will remain active for approximately 60 minutes,

PROVIDED THERE ARE NO OPEN DOORS.

Figure 12J-2-35

System Inactive

Lights are not illuminated

Automatic DOWN Operation of Driver’s Window

With the drivers window in the fully UP position and

the ignition switch turned to ON, press the driver

window switch to the window DOWN position for

more than 0.4 seconds and release.

The window will continue to lower automatically

until the fully DOWN position is reached.

To interrupt this function, press the UP button

momentarily or press and release the down button.

Figure 12J-2-36

Child Safety Switch

When the child safety switch (override switch) is

OFF, the rear windows can be opened or closed

from the centre console switch assembly or the

rocker switches in each of the rear doors.

To check the operation of this feature, proceed as

follows:

1. Ignition switched to ON.

2. Check that the green LED in each of the rear

door rocker switches is illuminated.

3. Open and close the rear door windows using the

rocker switches in the rear doors.

4. Press the child saf ety switch button in the centre

of the switch assem bly in the console as shown

in the Fig. 12J-2-37.

5. Check that the green LED in each of the rear

door rocker switches extinguishes and that the

rear windows can only be raised or lowered

from the switch in the centre console.

Figure 12J-2-37

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

A permanent magnet motor operates each of the power window mechanisms to raise or lower the window glass.

The direction in which the motor turns depends on the polarity of a voltage supplied to its terminals. The power

window switches, located in the centre console, or in the rear doors, control the polarity of the supply voltages.

The BCM has two main control functions in the power window system.

1. To control the operation of the power window relay and hence, power supply to the whole system.

2. To control the operation of the driver's side front window motor.

OPENING WINDOW - DRIVER'S DOOR

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-40 and 12J-2-41

Ignition ON Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-38)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition

switch and fuse F14 via circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire).

When the BCM receives an ignition ON input it energises the power windows relay (voltage supplied by fuse F20

circuit 440 Orange/Violet wire) by earthing the relay’s pull-in coil via circuit 173 (Yellow wire) and BCM terminal B2.

With the relay coil energised, the relay contacts close and power via fusible link FJ and circuit breaker F1 is applied

to the power window switches and each of the lights of the window switches (for rear door window switches, the

power window override switch in the front power window switch must be off). The opposite side of each light is

connected to earth, therefore the lights are illuminated (system active).

By depressing and releasing the driver's front window switch down button within 0.4 of a second (so as not to

engage the automatic down feature), this allows battery voltage from the power windows relay, circuit 1240

(Orange/Yellow wire), and the power window switch terminal 4, through to terminal 8 and then BCM terminal C14

(window down signal input), through the relay contacts and BCM terminal C2 to one side of the driver's side power

window motor on circuit 673 (Green/Orange wire).

The opposite side of the motor is connected to earth on circuit 672 Blue/White wire via power window switch

terminals 9 and 5 to circuit 156 (Black/Blue wire). This causes the motor armature to rotate, operating the window

regulator to lower the window.

As described under power windows general information, the driver's window will automatically travel fully downward

provided the power window switch down button is depressed for more than 0.4 seconds. The BCM microprocessor

senses the time the down button is depressed via terminal C14 and energises the internal relay so as to allow the

window to lower fully.

Figure 12J-2-38

Driver's Front Window Down Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-39)

With the driver's front window switch down button depressed, battery voltage from the power windows relay, circuit

1240 (Orange/Yellow wire), and the power window switch terminal 4, through to terminal 8 is applied to BCM

terminal C14 (window down signal input).

Figure 12J-2-39

When the BCM receives a driver's front window down switch input signal it energises an internal relay. This causes

the relay contacts to changeover, allowing battery voltage from the power windows relay contacts, BCM terminal C1,

through the BCM internal relay contacts and BCM terminal C2 to one side of the driver's side power window motor

on circuit 673 (Green/Orange wire).

If the window is travelling downward and the down button is again depressed, the BCM microprocessor senses this

(voltage again sensed at BCM terminal C14) and de-energises the internal relay, the contacts open and the motor

stops.

Should the up button be momentarily depressed whilst the window is travelling downward, positive battery voltage is

applied to both sides of the motor armature and the motor stops. If the up button is continuously depressed whilst

the window is travelling downward, the window down function is cancelled. The window will then move upward as

described in the following text.

Figure 12J-2-40

Figure 12J-2-41

CLOSING WINDOW

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-43)

Driver's Front Window Up Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-42)

By depressing and holding down driver's front window up button, battery voltage from the power windows relay

circuit 1240 (Orange/Yellow wire) is applied, via power window switch terminals 4 and 9, to the driver's side power

window motor circuit 672 (Blue/White wire).

The opposite side to the motor circuit 673 (Green/Orange wire) is connected to earth via BCM terminal C2, through

the BCM internal relay contacts, BCM terminal C14 to switch terminals 8 and 5 to earth on circuit 156 (Black/Blue

wire). This causes the motor armature to rotate, operating the window regulator to raise the window as long as the

power window switch up button is depressed.

Figure 12J-2-42

Window Operation - Passenger Doors

Power is supplied to all the power window switches from the power window relay (to the rear door switches provided

the power window override switch is off). If the power window override switch is on, (contacts between terminals 4

and 12 are open) the power supply to the rear door power window switches is interrupted.

With the switch buttons at rest, all switch contacts are connected to earth circuit 156 (Black/Blue wire). By

depressing the appropriate passenger's window sw itch down or up button, battery voltage from the power windows

relay, is applied to one side of the window motor, via the depressed switch button contact. With the other side of the

motor connected to earth, the motor armature will rotate, operating the window regulator to raise or lower the

window as long as the window switch button is depressed.

Figure 12J-2-43

1.6 ENGINE COOLING FAN LOW SPEED CONTROL

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

GENERAL INFORMATION

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-44 and 12J-2-45)

The engine has a two, two speed electric engine cooling fan assemblies that provide the primary means of moving

air through the engine radiator. These fans are placed between the radiator and the engine and have their own

shroud. These fans are used on all vehicles even if they are not equipped with air conditioning. There is no fan in

front of the A/C condenser.

The two, two speed electric engine cooling fans are used to cool engine coolant flowing through the radiator, and if

fitted, refrigerant flowing through the A/C condenser. The engine cooling fan motors have four terminals, two

negative and two positive terminals. The two positive terminals are permanently connected to battery voltage. When

one of the negative terminals is earthed, the fan motors will operate at low speed. When both negative terminals are

earthed, the fans operate at high speed.

The two speed electric fan's low speed can be enabled when the low speed engine cooling fan micro relay (located

in the engine compartment relay housing, labelled LO FAN) is energised by the BCM via a request from the

Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will request low speed fan enable and disable via serial data

communication to the BCM on circuit 1221 (Red/Black wire). After the PCM requests a change in the state of the

low speed relay (ie. OFF to ON or ON to OFF), the BCM will send a serial data response message back to the PCM

confirming it received the message. A failure in this response communication will set a PCM DTC 92.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

Figure 12J-2-44

The engine cooling low speed fan relay is energised by the BCM earthing terminal B7, circuit 473 (Orange/Brown

wire). This causes the relay contacts to switch over from 30-87A to 30-87 and circuit 157 (Black/Pink wire) is

earthed through the relay and to the low speed fan terminal on circuit 533 (Blue/Yellow wire). The other low speed

fan terminal is connected to battery voltage via circuit 204 (Orange wire) on FAN 1 and circuit 208 (Yellow wire) on

FAN 2.

The engine cooling fan relay is energised by the BCM. The PCM determines when to enable the low speed fan,

based on inputs from the BCM serial data, Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor and the Vehicle Speed

Sensor (VSS).

The low speed cooling fan relay will be turned ON' when:

A/C request indicated (YES) and either,

the vehicle speed less than 30 km/h.

A/C pressure is greater than 1500 kPa.

Coolant temperature is greater than 104°C. (V6) or 95°C. (V8)

If the engine coolant temperature is greater than 117°C, when the ignition is switched off, the relay is energised

for approximately 4 minutes. This is known as LOW FAN RUN ON.

An engine coolant temperature sensor fault is detected , such as DTC 14, 15, 16 or 17.

The cooling fan low speed relay will be turned ‘OFF’ when any of the following conditions have been met:

Coolant temperature less than 99°C. (V6) or 90°C. (V8)

A/C request not indicated (NO).

A/C request indicated (YES) and the vehicle speed greater than 50 km/h and A/C pressure is less than 1170

kPa.

Figure 12J-2-45

1.7 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL / AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF

(WITHOUT TWILIGHT SENTINEL)

GENERAL INFORMATION

The automatic light control (lights off) feature is designed to automatically switch the headlamps and parking lamps

off when the driver leaves the vehicle.

NOTE:

Since this system is safety related, it is mandatory that in the event of a system failure, the default status of the

BCM light control outputs are in the ON state when the ignition switch is in the IGN position. This will give direct

control of the lights to the headlamp switch.

The sequence of events required to switch the lights off automatically are as follows:

1. The vehicle road speed input to the BCM indicates speed is less than 10 kilometres per hour and there has not

been a sudden loss of speed (ignition being switched off with the vehicle travelling above 10 km/h).

2. The BCM senses that the ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF and remains in the off position.

3. The headlamp switch has not been turned on after the ignition switch was turned off.

4. The BCM senses the driver's door has been opened or that it is already open.

When the ignition switch is turned back to IGN position, the lights will turn back on to the position selected by the

headlamp switch and the mode of headlamps operation (ie. high or low beam or fog lamps [if fitted]) determined by

the position of the relevant switches.

Turning the headlamp switch off deactivates the automatic lights system.

There is a delay period before the automatic lights off feature deactivates the vehicle lights. This time period can be

set by the driver using the following procedure.

1. Turn ignition switch to the 'IGN' position, switch parking lamps on and close the driver's door.

2. Hold the headlamp switch instrument cluster illumination switch control lever in the down position continuously.

3. Turn the ignition switch off.

4. Open the driver's door.

This initiates the start of the time delay period.

5. Wait the required delay time period and release the illumination switch control lever.

This sets the time delay period and switches off the parking lamps.

The delay period adjustment is only possible whilst road speed input to the BCM is zero. A maximum of 180

seconds applies to the time delay period and the default setting is 0 seconds. The time delay period resets to

default value whenever the battery or fuse F31 is disconnected from the vehicle.

This time delay is also dependent on the priority key system. The time delay period can be set for the priority 1

and priority 2 keys. The time delay is recalled when the unlock button on the remote is pressed and is

dependent on whether priority 1 or priority 2 key is used.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuits details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-46)

Power Supplies

Battery voltage is applied to the low, high beam and fog lamps (if fitted) relays from fusible link FQ, circuit 2 (Red

wire) and fuses F30 and F29.

Battery voltage is applied to the parking lamps relay from fusible link FQ circuit 2 (Red wire) and fuse F4, circuit 840

(Orange/White wire).

The BCM controls the operation of the exterior light circuits by enabling its internal control circuit, which provides the

earth circuit for the relays.

High Beam Relay Earth Circuit

The earth circuit for the high beam headlamp relay is via circuit 10, (Blue/Yellow wire), through the headlamp and

turn signal control (flash/dip) switch assembly, circuit 147 (White/Black wire), headlamp switch contacts to BCM

terminal E28, circuit 1150 (Black wire) and then to earth through internal switching.

Low Beam Relay Earth Circuit

The earth circuit for the low beam headlamp relay is via 103 (White wire), through the headlamp and turn signal

control (flash/dip) switch assembly, circuit 147 (White/Black wire), headlamp switch contracts to BCM terminal E28,

circuit 1150 (Black wire) and then to earth through internal switching.

Parking Lamps Relay Earth Circuit

The earth circuit for the parking lamps relay is via circuit 49 (Blue wire), the closed parking lamps contacts in the

headlamp switch, through BCM terminal E28, circuit 1150 (Black wire) and then to earth through internal switching.

Figure 12J-2-46

Headlamp Control Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-47)

The BCM monitors the voltage on terminal E28 to determine the position of the headlamp and parking lamp switch.

When the headlamps or parking lamp are on, the voltage at BCM terminal E28 will be less than 0.2 volt. When the

automatic headlamps OFF system has turned the lights off, the voltage at terminal E28 will be 12 volts. If the

headlamp switch is turned off, the voltage at terminal E28 will be less than 0.2 volt. The BCM sees this low voltage

at terminal E28 as a change in status of the headlamp switch and will turn the automatic lights system off. The lights

will then turn back on when a change in position of the switch occurs.

Figure 12J-2-47

Driver’s Door Open Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-48)

When the driver’s door is opened, BCM terminal C8 is connected to earth via circuit 126 (Grey/White wire) and the

driver's door jamb switch. This causes the voltage at terminal C8 to pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (driver's door

open). This low voltage at terminal C8 is seen by the BCM as the driver's door open input signal.

Figure 12J-2-48

Vehicle Speed Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-49)

The BCM terminal E2, receives the vehicle speed from the PCM via the serial data communications bus, circuit

1221 (Red/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-49

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-50)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition

switch and fuse F14 via circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-50

Instrument Illumination Dimmer Switch Input

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-51)

When the illumination switch lever is in the down position (DIM-), BCM terminal E11 is connected to earth via the

headlamp switch and the 2.7 kilohm resistor in the switch assembly. This causes the voltage at BCM terminal E11

to go from above 5 volts to approximately 1.3 volts. This voltage at BCM terminal E11 is seen by the BCM as the

input signal that determines the delay period for the automatic lights off feature for the period that the voltage is

present.

NOTE:

This circuit will only work while the headlamp switch is in the PARK or ON positions.

Figure 12J-2-51

1.8 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL / AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON AND OFF

(WITH TWILIGHT SENTINEL)

GENERAL INFORMATION

The automatic light control (lights on and off) feature (with twilight sentinel) turns the vehicle headlamps on and off,

depending on the outside light level. This feature will work only while the headlamp switch is in the Auto position and

the ignition on, the lights will operate as normal in other switch positions.

The operation of the headlamps when the ignition is switched off and the headlamp switch in the Auto position will

be the same as the Auto lights off operation.

A sensor is mounted in the instrument panel pad of the vehicle to monitor the amount of light in front of the vehicle.

The BCM monitors the output of this sensor and determines when the light levels are low enough to turn them on.

TECH 2 can be used to select several different ON/OFF light levels to suit the customer preferences.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-54)

Light Sensor Control Input

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-52)

The light sensor produces a voltage proportional to the amount of ambient light. This voltage can vary between 0

and 5 volts depending on the amount of light. The BCM determines the light value from the voltage on terminal E10,

circuit 272 (Yellow/Black wire). The BCM reads this input to determine if the headlamps should be on or off. TECH 2

should be used to measure the performance of the light sensor.

Figure 12J-2-52

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-53)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is on or off. When the ignition switch is in the

IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition switch and fuse F14 via

circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-53

Power Supplies

Battery voltage is applied to the low and high beam relays from fusible link FQ, circuit 2 (Red wire) and fuses F30

and F29. Battery voltage is applied to the parking lamps relay from fusible link FQ, circuit 2 (Red wire) and fuse F4,

circuit 840 (Orange/White wire). The BCM controls the operation of the exterior lights by switching its internal

control circuit, which provides the earth circuit for the relays, on or off. If the ambient light level is low, the BCM will

energise the control circuit, turning the lights on. If the ambient light level is high, the BCM will de-energise the

control circuit, turning the lights off.

High Beam Relay Earth Circuit

The earth circuit for the high beam headlamp relay is via circuit 10 (Blue/Yellow wire), through the headlamp and

turn signal control switch assembly, circuit 147 (White/Black wire), headlamp switch contacts to BCM terminal E12,

circuit 308 (White/Red wire) and then to earth through the internal control circuit.

Low Beam Relay Earth Circuit

The earth circuit for the low beam headlamp relay is via circuit 103 (White wire), through the headlamp and turn

signal control switch assembly, circuit 147 (White/Black wire), headlamp switch contacts to BCM terminal E12,

circuit 308 (White/Red wire) and then to earth through the internal control circuit.

Parking lamps Relay Earth Cir cuit

The earth circuit for the parking lamps relay is via circuit 49 (Blue wire), the closed parking lamp contacts in the

headlamp switch, through the BCM terminal E12, circuit 308 (White/Red wire) and then to earth through the internal

control circuit.

Figure 12J-2-54

1.9 ROAD SPEED DEPENDENT VARIABLE DWELL WIPER SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

This system controls the intermittent dwell time of the windshield wiper motor. The dwell time is determined via a

combination of vehicle road speed and adjustable potentiometer (located in the wiper/washer left hand stalk control)

inputs to the BCM. In broad terms, the faster the vehicle travels, the shorter the dwell time of the wipers (time

between wiper sweeps).

The wipers employ a 'wipe after wash' function where, if the relevant washer pump switch has been pressed for

more than 0.5 seconds, the wipers start sweeping at low speed continuously until the washer pump has been

disengaged, following which the wiper will be held on for a calculated time period so that the following number of

sweeps can be completed:

• 1 additional sweep if washer switch is pressed for less than 1 second.

• 2 additional sweeps if washer switch is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds.

• 3 additional sweeps if washer switch is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds.

In order to correctly perform the number of additional sweeps, the wiper motor park switch is monitored. This allows

the wiper supply power to be transferred to the park switch at the optimum time.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

In addition to the system controlling the intermittent dwell time of the windshield wiper motor, it also controls the

function of the rear wiper motor on Berlina wagon models. The rear wiper will wipe continuously when the vehicle is

put into reverse gear and the rear wiper switch is on (communication between the PCM and BCM via serial data

bus). This option can be changed, via TECH 2, so the rear wiper will wipe continuously when the vehicle is put into

reverse gear and the front wiper switch is on.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-61 and 12J-2-62

Intermittent Wiper Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig.12J-2-55)

Placing the wiper/washer switch in the intermittent (INT) position causes battery voltage, via fusible link FJ, the

ignition switch contacts, fuse F18, circuit 41 (Brown/Green wire) and the wiper washer switch INT contacts to be

applied to BCM terminal E27, circuit 97 (Blue/White wire). This voltage at E27 is seen by the BCM as the

intermittent wiper input signal.

This then enables the BCM to energise the intermittent wiper relay. This causes battery voltage from fuse F18 to be

applied to the wiper motor low speed circuit, circuit 95 (Green wire), through the wiper switch terminals to, circuit 91

(Grey/Red wire). This voltage will cause the wiper motor armature to rotate, which inturn causes the wiper motor

park switch contacts to change over from A-B to A-C.

Once the motor armature starts to rotate, battery voltage will be applied to BCM terminal B8 from fuse F18, circuit

41 (Brown/Green wire), through the wiper motor park switch contacts (A and C) and circuit 196 (Yellow w ire). Once

the wiper motor enters its 'parked' region, the wiper park switch contacts change over from A-C to A-B. BCM

terminal B8 will now be connected to earth through circuit 196 (Yellow wire), the wiper motor park switch contacts A-

B and circuit 152 (Black/White wire). This action causes the voltage at terminal B8 to go from battery voltage to less

than 0.2 volt. This low voltage at B8 is seen by the BCM as the park switch input signal. The BCM will then turn the

intermittent wiper relay off and the wiper motor will stop rotating.

Wiper Dwell Control Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-56)

BCM terminal E5 is connected to earth through the windshield wiper dwell control switch, circuit 96 (Grey/Black

wire) and circuit 155 (Black/Yellow wire). Adjusting the switch from slow to fast will cause the potentiometer

(variable resistor) inside the switch to vary in resistance. This change in resistance will cause the voltage at BCM

terminal E5 to vary from approximately 0.6 to 2.5 volts. As the voltage increases, the intermittent wiper dwell time

decreases.

NOTE:

If the battery is disconnected and reconnected, it is necessary for the dwell pot to be rotated from one extreme to

the other so the BCM can learn the values and properly calculate the dwell value.

Figure 12J-2-55

Figure 12J-2-56

Vehicle Speed Input Signal and Reverse Gear Input

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-57)

The BCM, terminal E2, receives vehicle speed information from the PCM via the serial communications bus, circuit

1221 (Red/Black wire). TECH 2 can be used to view the vehicle speed through the diagnostic connector.

Terminal E2 of the BCM receives data relating to the selection of reverse gear from the PCM via the serial data bus,

circuit 1221 (Red/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-57

Window Washer Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-58)

When the washer pump switch is activated, battery voltage is applied to the washer pump and BCM terminal E25

from fuse F18, circuit 41 (Brown/Green wire), the washer switch contacts and circuit 94 (L/Blue wire). This causes

the voltage at BCM terminal E25 to go from less than 0.2 volt to 12 volts. This voltage is seen by the BCM as the

washer switch input signal. The length of time this voltage is present at BCM terminal E25 will determine how many

additional wiper sweeps will occur.

The BCM determines the number of sweeps the wipers have completed by monitoring the voltage at terminal B8,

park switch input, as the voltage at B8 will go from 12 volts to less than 0.2 volt at the completion of each sweep.

Figure 12J-2-58

Rear Wiper Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-59)

Placing the wiper washer switch in the rear wipe position causes battery voltage, via fusible link FJ, the ignition

switch contacts, fuse F18, circuit 41 (Brown/Green wire) and the wiper washer switch rear contacts to be applied to

BCM terminal E19, circuit 1391 (Grey/Red wire). This voltage at E19 is seen by the BCM as the rear wiper input

signal.

Figure 12J-2-59

Rear Window Washer Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-60)

When the rear washer pump switch is activated, battery voltage is applied to the washer pump and BCM terminal

E15 from fuse F18, circuit 41 (Brown/Green wire), the washer switch contacts, circuit 494 (White/Blue wire). This

causes the voltage at BCM terminal E15 to go from less than 0.2 volt to 12 volts. This voltage is seen by the BCM

as the rear washer switch input signal.

Figure 12J-2-60

Figure 12J-2-61

Figure 12J-2-62

1.10 SPEED SENSITIVE POWER STEERING

GENERAL INFORMATION

This control system of the BCM varies the amount of power assistance given to the steering of the vehicle in order

to allow high boost at low speed or parking and low boost at high speeds for better centre steering performance.

The body control module contains a curve of speed versus boost (or control solenoid current) stored in memory.

The power steering boost is adjusted by accurately controlling the current flowing in the boost solenoid attached to

the steering gear valve housing. If the BCM detects a system malfunction the BCM will gradually change to a default

boost value at a predetermined rate.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuits details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or the Wiring Diagrams.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-63)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition

switch and fuse F14 via circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-63

Vehicle Speed Input Signal

(Refer to Fig.12J-2-64)

The BCM, terminal E2, receives vehicle speed information from the PCM via the serial communications bus, circuit

1221 (Red/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-64

Power Steering Solenoid

(Refer to Fig.12J-2-65)

Battery voltage is applied to the power steering solenoid from the ignition switch, circuit 3 (Pink wire), through fuse

F15, circuit 139 (Pink wire), with the opposite end of the solenoid winding connected to BCM terminal E4, circuit 556

(Black/L Green wire).

The BCM then controls the operation of the power steering solenoid by applying a pulse width modulated signal to

an internal switch, this earth’s the power steering solenoid.

Figure 12J-2-65

Solenoid Valve Operation

The BCM controls the operation of the boost

solenoid by supplying a Pulse Width Modulated

(PWM) signal to the solenoid that varies

proportionally with vehicle road speed. The signal is

modulated at a frequency of 167 Hz. As shown by

the typical diagram s in the F igure oppos ite both the

average PW M solenoid current and the modulated

pressure are relatively similar. Further, maximum

modulation pressure is only applied during parking

and up to a low speed of a few km/h.

Reference to the following table and the Figure

opposite shows the relative P.W .M. c urrent flow for

respective road speeds.

General Curve Characteristics

CURRENT

(Amp.) ROAD SPEED

(km/h)

0.75

0.45

0.0

0 - 12

80+

By changing the pulse width (tim e O N) of the s ignal

sent to the solenoid, the amount of assistance

delivered by the power steering can be varied.

When maximum assistance is required (low vehicle

speed), the BCM increases the signal duty cycle

ON tim e (lengthening the pulse width of the s ignal)

to approximately 50%. This will cause a current of

approximately 750 mA of flow through the solenoid.

As vehicle speed inc r eases , the BCM pr ogres s ively

decreases the assistance by decreasing the duty

cycle ON time (shortening the pulse width of the

signal) thereby decreasing the solenoid current

until zero current flow is achieved. At this point

minim um assistance will be delivered by the power

steering system.

When activated, the power steering solenoid

receives a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) current

flow from the BCM that varies proportionally with

vehicle road speed.

From this point, the modulated pressure falls

progressively until, at approximately 80 km/h,

modulated pressure decreases to a minimum. It is

at this time also, that the solenoid receives no

further current pulses from the BCM.

Figure 12J-2-66 shows a typical speed sensitive

power steering pulse width modulated current flow.

Figure 12J-2-66

The figure opposite illustrates a sectioned view

through the power s teering gear valve hous ing. T he

steering gear boost solenoid operates an internal

'flapper' valve, loc ated in the fluid return side of the

valve housing. The operation of the 'flapper' valve

causes changes in hydraulic pressure and allows

progressive movement of the steering gear valve

housing outer sleeve along the inner shaft valve

member. This movement of the outer sleeve

causes the change in steering gear boost

characteristics.

The most accurate method of testing the speed

sensitive power steering electrical system is by

using TECH 2.

The BCM has a spec ial des ign f eature inc or porated

so that when an open or short circuit is detected in

the drive circuits to the power steering solenoid, ie.

circuits 139 and 556, the BCM will automatically

switch the drive circuits accordingly. Figure 12J-2-67

In the event of an interm ittent open circuit due to a

faulty connection, the BCM microprocessor may

need to be reset before carrying out testing.

When carrying out any testing on the system,

ensure that the ignition is switched off, otherwise if

a connection is broken anywhere in the circuit

(disconnecting power steering solenoid connector

from the main wiring harness connector YB63) the

control system in the BCM will turn power off to the

boost solenoid.

NOTE:

Even changing multimeter range selection while

connected to solenoid circ uitry, with ignition on, can

cause the system to default to low boost.

Figure 12J-2-68

To reset the complete BCM memory, switch ignition

off, remove fuse F31 from engine compartment

relay housing, then refit after approximately one

second.

When resetting of the BCM m icr oprocess or occ urs,

a clicking sound may be heard from within the BCM

if the dome lamp relay is active.

Power Steering Pumps

On vehicles f itted with High Series BCM, the power

steering pumps fitted ARE NOT the Droop Flow

type pumps as fitted to vehicles with Low Series

BCM. The difference in pumps is that the Non

Droop Flow type pumps do not incorporate the

metering needle valve in the pump outlet fitting.

Therefore, if replacing a power steering pump,

ensure the correct type is fitted.

Figure 12J-2-69

1.11 P O WER ANTENNA CONTROL

GENERAL INFORMATION

The BCM controls the power antenna operation. The power antenna has two inputs from the BCM.

1. BCM provides power to the antenna motor.

2. BCM controls antenna mast direction up or down.

The power antenna assembly incorporates maximum and minimum height limit switches and a slip clutch.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Operation of the power antenna is as follows:

When the radio/cassette player ON signal (refer to Fig.12J-2-70) is sensed by the BCM, the antenna mast extends

to the same height it was when last in operation (provided antenna height memory option enabled).

If at some time the battery has been disconnected, the antenna height memory setting will be lost. In this case, the

antenna default height is 6 seconds of mast upward travel, which is approximately 60 centimetres above the fender

panel.

The antenna mast height memory is dependent on correct battery voltage, clean antenna mast and no kinks in the

mast cord. A tolerance of plus or minus 100 mm is acceptable for mast height.

When signals from the ANTENNA UP or ANTENNA DOWN switches are sensed, the antenna mast will move

accordingly. However, these switches do not operate when there is no signal sensed by the BCM from the

radio/cassette player or when accessory signal (ignition switch ACC position) is not present.

When the signal from the radio/cassette is turned off, operation of the antenna is as follows:

1. If the ignition switch is turned to the OFF (accessories off) position, there is a delay of approximately 15 seconds

before the antenna mast fully retracts.

2. If the ignition switch is turned to the ON (or ACC) position, the antenna mast will fully retract after 3 seconds.

During engine starting, the radio/cassette player 'on' signal is momentarily lost and during this time, it is assumed by

the BCM that the signal is still active as it senses both ignition and accessories inputs, as well as radio/cassette

player status signal. This enables the antenna operation and control is unaffected during engine cranking.

Operation of the power antenna is also affected by the theft deterrent system (antenna mast retracts when system

is armed).

The antenna mast height memory is also dependent on the priority key system. Antenna height memory can be set

and stored for the priority 1 and priority 2 keys. The antenna height memory is recalled when the unlock button on

the remote key is pressed, and is dependent on whether the priority 1 key or priority 2 key is used.

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-72 and 12J-2-74)

Radio On Input Signal (PD)

(Refer to Figure 12J-2-70)

When the radio/cassette player is turned on, battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal E16 via circuit 143

(Yellow/Red wire). This causes the voltage at terminal E16 to go from less than 0.2 volts (radio off) to 12 volts (radio

on), The voltage at terminal E16 is seen by the BCM as the radio ‘ON’, input signal.

Figure 12J-2-70

Antenna Up Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-71)

When the antenna UP switch is depressed the voltage at BCM terminal E14 will be pulled low, less than 0.2 volts

(antenna up switch contacts closed). BCM terminal E14 is now connected to earth via circuit 161 (L/Blue wire), the

antenna UP switch and circuit 1151B (Black/White wire).

The earth applied to terminal E14 is seen by the BCM as the antenna UP input signal. The BCM then applies 12

volts to the antenna direction relay, in the power antenna assembly, from BCM terminal C17 via circuit 954 (Grey

wire). This energises the antenna direction relay causing the relay contacts to switch to the antenna UP position. As

battery voltage will also be applied to the antenna motor from BCM terminal C4, circuit 145 (Green wire) at this time

the antenna motor will rotate, driving the antenna mast upward. The earth circuit for the power antenna motor is via

the antenna earth lead.

Figure 12J-2-71

Figure 12J-2-72

Antenna Up Memory Height

When the radio \ cassette is turned ON, 12 volts is applied to BCM terminal E16 from the radio via circuit 143

(Yellow/Red wire). This causes the voltage at terminal E16 to go from less than 0.2 volt (radio 'off') to 12 volts (radio

'on').

This radio 'on' signal will cause the BCM to apply 12 volts to the antenna direction relay from BCM terminal C17 via

circuit 954 (Grey wire). This energises the antenna direction relay causing the relay contacts to switch to the

antenna UP position. The BCM will also energise its internal relay and battery voltage will be applied to the power

antenna motor for enough time to allow the power antenna motor armature to rotate and drive the antenna mast in

the upward direction to the same height it was when last in operation.

NOTE:

If battery supply from fuse F31 is lost at any time to the BCM, antenna memory will be lost and will need to be reset.

Antenna Down Switch Input Signa

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-73)

The downward direction of travel of the power antenna is also controlled by the BCM. When the antenna DOWN

switch is depressed the voltage at BCM terminal E13 will be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (antenna down switch

contacts closed). The BCM terminal E13 is now connected to earth via circuit 160 (White wire), the antenna DOWN

switch and circuit 1151B (Black/White wire). The earth applied to terminal E13 is seen by the BCM as the antenna

DOWN input signal.

The BCM does not apply 12 volts to the antenna direction relay, therefore the antenna direction relay contacts will

remain in the DOWN position. As battery voltage will be applied to the antenna motor from BCM terminal C4 the

antenna motor armature will rotate, driving the antenna mast downward.

Figure 12J-2-73

Figure 12J-2-74

1.12 DOME LAMP DELAY CONTROL

GENERAL INFORMATION

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuits details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

The interior lighting is controlled by the BCM or by the dome lamp switch (incorporated with the dome and reading

lamps cluster). The interior lighting is activated when any door is opened, unlocked with the remote coded key or

when the dome lamp switch is operated. The various modes of operation are as follows:

Operation with door opening:

The interior lighting operates for at least 30 minutes whilst any door is open. After all doors have been closed, the

lamp/s remains activated for an additional 30 seconds.

However, if the ignition is switched on, the delay time is cancelled and the lamp/s go off immediately.

Operation with dome lamp switch:

The dome lamp switch is a 3 position switch with; doors, OFF and ON positions which turns the interior lighting on

when closed. If the interior lighting has been activated by some other BCM control system or action, the dome lamp

switch will turn the interior lighting off when it is switched from ON to OFF (with the sole exception of dome light

flash when the theft deterrent system is triggered). This means that the switch can curtail any delay time initiated as

well as switch the lighting off whilst a door is open. The BCM also monitors the position of the doors and controls

the dome lamp accordingly.

When the interior lighting has been activated by the dome lamp switch, and the ignition is off, a delay time of 120

minutes applies.

Operation with central locking:

Provided the dome lamp switch is in the doors position, the interior lighting is switched on upon central door

unlocking for 30 seconds. If the ignition is turned on during this delay, the interior lighting will be switch off

immediately. Interior lighting is also switched off upon central door locking or deadlocking.

If any of the passenger doors are open while the doors are locked, the interior lighting will remain on. The lighting

will turn off immediately only when that particular door is closed.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-80)

Battery voltage is applied to all interior lights via fuse F6 and circuit 1140 (Orange/Black wire). The opposite side of

the dome lamps are connected to earth via circuit 174 (White/Green wire) and BCM terminal C24. The BCM

controls the operation of the dome lamps connected to this earth circuit by energising its internal dome lamp relay,

this causes the relay contacts to close completing the circuit to earth.

Ignition Switch ON Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-75)

The BCM uses this input signal to determine when the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position. When the

ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to the BCM terminal E20 from the ignition

switch and fuse F14 via circuit 39 (Pink/Black wire).

Figure 12J-2-75

Passenger Door Open Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-76)

When any passenger door is opened, BCM terminal C7 is connected to earth via circuit 125 (White wire) and the

passenger door jamb switch. This causes the voltage at terminal C7 to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (passenger

door open). This low voltage at terminal C7 is seen by the BCM as the passenger door open input signal.

Figure 12J-2-76

Driver’s Door Open Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-77)

When the driver’s door is opened, BCM terminal C8 is connected to earth via circuit 126 (Grey/White wire) and the

driver’s door jamb switch. This causes the voltage at terminal C8 to be pulled low, less than 0.2 volt (driver's door

open). This low voltage at terminal C8 is seen by the BCM as the driver's door input signal.

Figure 12J-2-77

Dome Lamp Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-78 and 12J-2-79)

Dome ON

When the dome lamp switch is in the ON position, battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal C5 from fuse F6 via

circuit 1140 (Orange/Brown wire), dome lamp switch contacts, and circuit 175 (Violet wire). This voltage at BCM

terminal C5 is seen by the BCM as the dome lamp switch on input signal.

Dome DOOR

When the dome lamp switch is switched to the DOOR position, battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal C19 from

fuse F6 via circuit 1140 (Orange/Black wire) dome lamp switch contacts and circuit 722 (Yellow/Blue wire). This

voltage at BCM terminal C19 is seen by the BCM as the dome lamp switch DOOR input signal.

Figure 12J-2-78

Figure 12J-2-79

Figure 12J-2-80

1.13 INSTRUME NT DIMMING CONTROL

GENERAL INFORMATION

The instrument dimming control allows for illumination level adjustment of the instrument dial faces, dash and

centre console illumination, as well as display windows of the trip computer, climate control and radio. The

illumination level is adjusted by moving the spring loaded control lever on the headlamp switch. The lever operates

two momentary contact switches within the headlamp switch. The dimmer drives to full load when both the ignition

is on and the parking lamps are switched off to give maximum illumination intensity. When the parking lamps are

switched on, the dimmer will operate according to the level previously set and provide the voltage variation

compensation required to maintain the same brightness, irrespective of the ignition switch position.

The instrument illumination intensity is also dependent on the priority key system. Instrument illumination intensity

can be set for priority 1 and 2 keys. The intensity is recalled when the unlock button or the remote key is pressed,

and is dependent on whether priority 1 or 2 key is used.

To decrease dash illumination intensity, the switch control lever must be held down for the required time for the

BCM to decrease instrument cluster and trip computer illumination intensity. To increase illumination intensity, the

switch control lever must be held up for the required time for the BCM to increase the illumination intensity.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuit details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-84)

The BCM controls the operation of the instrument illumination dimming by controlling the current flow through the

instrument illumination circuit. This is achieved by turning the instrument illumination earth circuit on and off. As the

on time increases, so to does the current flowing through the circuit. As this pulse width modulated current flow (on

time) increases, the instrument illumination intensity will also increase.

Battery voltage is applied to the trip computer display illumination from the ignition switch, via circuit 3 (Pink wire),

fuse F13 and circuit 44 (Pink/Blue wire). The earth circuit is via circuit 8 (Grey wire) through the BCM terminal A2.

Battery voltage is applied to the instrument cluster illumination lights, radio illumination and climate control

illumination from the parking illumination lamp relay to fuse F11, circuit 19 (Brown/White wire). The earth circuit is

via circuit 8 (Grey wire) through the BCM terminal A2.

NOTE:

The instrument cluster, radio, climate control and trip computer illumination lights are the only illumination lights that

are variable in intensity, this control is carried out by the BCM. All other switch or dash illumination lights are not

controlled via the BCM and therefore, all these lights are directly connected to earth.

Parking Lamps Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-81)

When the parking lamps are turned on, the parking lamps relay is earthed through circuit 49 (Blue wire), the

parklamp switch contacts, circuit 1150 (Black wire), BCM terminal E28 and to earth via an internal switch. This

places a voltage at BCM terminal E11, approximately 2.5 volts (resistor dividing network dimmer resistors 5.4 kΩ

and BCM internal resistor). This enables the BCM to determine that the parking lamps are turned on and internal

switching is activated to turn on the instrument illumination lamps.

Figure 12J-2-81

Ignition Switch 'ON' Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-82)

When the ignition switch is in the IGN or START position, battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal E20 via circuit

39 (Pink/Black wire). This causes the voltage at terminal E20 to go from less than 0.2 volts (ignition OFF) to 12 volts

(ignition IGN or START). The voltage at terminal E20 is seen by the BCM as the ignition ON input signal.

Figure 12J-2-82

Illumination Dimmer Control Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-83)

BCM terminal E11 is connected to earth when the headlamp switch is in the park position, through the dimmer

control line via two 2.7 kohm series resistors in the spring loaded instrument illumination control lever on the

headlamp switch, the headlamp parking lamp switch contacts circuit 1150 (Black wire), BCM terminal YE28 to earth

via an internal switch.

With the headlamp switch in the OFF position, the voltage at BCM terminal E11 is approximately 8.0 volts. With the

headlamp switch in the PARK position, the voltage at the BCM terminal will be 2.5 volts. This enables the BCM to

determine that the parking lamps are turned on and internal switching is activated to turn on the instrument

illumination lamps. When the BCM detects the lamps are turned off, the instrument dimming output is set to full

brightness for the trip computer illumination.

When the headlamp switch control lever is held up (DIM +), both resistors are shorted and the voltage at BCM

terminal E11 should be approximately 0.2 volts. When the headlamp switch control lever is held down (DIM - ), one

of the two series resistors is shorted and the voltage at BCM terminal E11 should be approximately 1.5 volts.

Figure 12J-2-83

Figure 12J-2-84

1.14 REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

This system monitors the tail, stop and license

plate lamps fo r bulb failures, as well as the integrity

of the fuses feeding these systems. The system

does not sense trailer lights and the system

integrity will not be aff ected if they are connected to

the vehicle.

The system is capable of detecting a single bulb

failure with the following circuit loads:

1. Tail lamps:

4 X 5 Watt = 20 Watt

2. Stop lamps:

2 X 21 + 1 X 18 Watt = 60 Watt

3. License plate lamps:

2 X 5 Watt = 10 Watt

NOTE:

Power ratings are at 12 Volts.

A rear lamp bulb or system failure warning to the

driver is conveyed via a warning light in the

instrument cluster with the following indications:

1. Steady illumination of the warning light with

tail/headlamps turned on indicates a rear tail

lamp failure is evident.

2. Steady illumination of warning light when the

brake pedal is depressed indicates a rear stop

lamp failure is evident.

The system only operates whilst the ignition is on

and any failure is cleared when ignition is switched

off.

A warning light test of 1.2 seconds is performed

whenever the ignition is switched on.

Figure 12J-2-85

NOTE:

If the battery is disconnected during any service

operation, a bulb relearn procedure has to be

carried out, refer to the following procedure.

Additionally, the ABS or ABS/ETC s ystem s must be

functional for the rear lamp failure to operate.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General

Description Section are to aid in interpreting the

operation of the c ircuit and therefor e, only the main

connectors and wiring colours are shown. For

com plete circuits details, r efer to either the r elevant

diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING

DIAGRAMS.

REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING SYSTEM BULB

RELEARN PROCEDURE

This procedure must be carried out if the battery

has been disconnected.

Ensure battery is fully charged and functional

before carrying out the following procedure:

1. Ensure all rear light bulbs are working.

Replace/repair any faulty bulbs/wiring.

2. Tur n ignition OFF, parking lam ps O FF and st op

lamps OFF.

3. Remove and reinstall fuse F31 from engine

compartment relay housing, to reset BCM.

4. Start engine and allow to idle.

5. Switch parking lamps ON.

6. Wait 5 seconds.

7. Press brake pedal and hold.

8. Wait 5 seconds.

9. Switch parking lamps OFF.

Wait 5 seconds.

10. Bulb relearn is now complete, turn engine OFF

and release brake pedal.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-88)

The BCM monitors the stop and tail and licence plate lamps earth circuit current flow. The earth circuit for the stop

and tail lamps is through the BCM from terminal C15 circuit 1251 (Brown/White wire) to B10 circuit 151

(Black/Green wire).

Rear Lamp Failure Warning Lamp

When the ignition switch is turned to the IGN position, battery voltage is applied to the instrument cluster module,

the module will then turn the rear lamp failure warning light on for approximately 1.5 seconds. In the event of a stop,

tail or licence plate lamp failure, the BCM will send a serial data signal via the serial data bus to the instrument

cluster module which will turn the rear lamp failure light on.

Parking Lamp Fuse Monitor Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-86)

Battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal E24 from fuse F4, circuit 840 (Orange/White wire) and from circuit 2

(Red wire). If battery voltage is not available at E24 when the ignition switch is in the IGN position, the BCM

determines that the parking lamp fuse (or circuit) has failed and will illuminate the warning light via the serial data

bus.

Parking La mp Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-86)

When the parking lamps are turned on, the instrument dimming series resistors are connected to earth via the

parking lamp switch contacts, BCM terminal E28 and an internal BCM transistor switched to ground. The voltage at

terminal E11 of the BCM is approximately 2.5 volts w hich is seen by the BCM as the parking lamps on input signal.

With the parking lamps on, the BCM will check the current flowing from terminals C15 to B10. If the current flow

does not match the learnt current flow (refer relearn procedure) the BCM will turn the warning light on, via the

auxiliary serial data bus.

Figure 12J-2-86

Stop Lamp Fuse Monitor Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-87)

Battery voltage is applied to BCM terminal E18 from fuse F5, circuit 640 (Orange/Blue wire) and from circuit 2 (Red

wire). If battery voltage is not available at E18 when the ignition switch is in the IGN position, the BCM determines

that the stop lamp fuse (or circuit) has failed and will illuminate the warning lamp, via the serial data bus.

Stop Lamp Switch Input Signal

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-87)

When the brake pedal is depressed the stop lamp switch contacts close and battery voltage is applied to the ABS

module from fuse F5 circuit 640 (Orange/Blue wire), the stop lamp switch contacts, circuit 20 (Blue/Red wire). This

action causes the ABS module to send a signal in the form of serial data to the BCM via the auxiliary serial data

bus. This serial data is interpreted by the BCM as the stop lamp switch input signal.

With the stop lamps on, the BCM will check the current flowing from terminals C15 to B10. If the current flow does

not match the learnt current flow (refer REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING SYSTEM BULB RELEARN

PROCEDURE), the BCM will illuminate the warning lamp, via the auxiliary serial data bus.

Figure 12J-2-87

Figure 12J-2-88

1.15 CRUIS E CONTROL INTERFACE

GENERAL INFORMATION

The cruise control module uses an input on the BCM to send a serial data message to the instruments.

When the cruise control module is powered up via the cruise control ON/OFF switch the cruise control module

activates an input of the BCM. The BCM sees this line as active and sends a serial data message to the instrument

cluster to turn it’s CRUISE light on.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuits details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-89 and 12J-2-90)

When the cruise control is turned on, the cruise control module activates its cruise ‘on’ output to the BCM. The BCM

input E26, circuit 83 (Grey wire) rises from less than 0.2 volt to approximately battery voltage. When this happens,

the BCM senses this as a cruise on signal and communicates with the instruments, via serial data bus (Aux) to turn

the CRUISE lamp on.

Figure 12J-2-89

Figure 12J-2-90

1.16 PRIORITY KEY SYSTEM

GENERAL INFORMATION

The BCM provides the ability to remember two sets of system operating parameters. These operating parameters

are recalled when a specific remote key is used. When a priority one remote coded key is used, the BCM will recall

the operating parameters related to the priority one key. When a priority two key is used, the BCM will recall the

operating parameters related to the priority two key.

The operating parameters recalled are for the following functions:

• Time delay for automatic headlamps off.

• Antenna height memory.

• Instrument dimmer level.

These operating parameters are recalled when the UNLOCK button on the remote key is pressed or when the

ignition is turned to the ACC position, all operating parameters are maintained on a last used basis.

The BCM also communicates to other modules via the serial data bus, identifying which priority mode (priority one

or priority two) each module should be in.

The serial data bus priority information will be used by the following modules:

• Trip computer, mode and overspeed setting.

• Electronic Climate Control, all settings.

• Power / Economy switch position.

In addition the BCM also includes a priority output line.

The priority output line sets the radio’s priority mode. When this output is low, the radio settings are set for priority

one. When this output is high, the radio settings are set for priority two.

When a new remote key is programmed, it is assigned as the priority one key. All remaining remote keys become

priority two keys. Any remote key can be assigned as the priority one key using TECH 2, all other keys will then

become priority two keys.

NOTE:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuits details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

(Refer to Figs. 12J-2-91 and 12J-2-92)

When the UNLOCK button on the remote key is activated or the ignition is switched on, the BCM will send serial

data via the serial data interface auxiliary bus to the trip computer, ECC module and PCM. Depending on which

remote key was activated (priority one or priority two), the BCM will identify via this serial data, which mode each

module should be in.

Figure 12J-2-91

Figure 12J-2-92

Priority Key Mode

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-93)

The priority one output line sets the radio’s priority mode. When the voltage on this output is pulled low, the radio

settings are set for priority one. When the voltage on this output is pulled high, the radio settings are set for priority

two.

Figure 12J-2-93

1.17 SRS DEPLOYMENT VEHICLE SHUTDOWN

GENERAL INFORMATION

In the event of SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) deployment, the Sensing Diagnostic Modules (SDM) will send

serial data via the auxiliary serial data bus to advise various vehicle systems to take appropriate shutdown action.

The BCM will monitor this serial data (via the auxiliary serial data bus), and perform the following actions once the

appropriate data is identified and the vehicle speed is zero km/h for longer than 10 seconds:

• Turn the dome lamp on continuously

• Unlock all doors

The dome lamps will be switched off when the ignition switch is cycled from off to on or when the BCM is reset (ie.

the battery is disconnected).

NOTE 1:

The PCM (Powertrain Control Module) also monitors this serial data (via the auxiliary serial data bus), and performs

a vehicle shut down once the appropriate data is identified and the vehicle speed is zero km/h for longer than 10

seconds.

NOTE 2:

The circuit diagrams shown in this General Description Section are to aid in interpreting the operation of the circuit

and therefore, only the main connectors and wiring colours are shown. For complete circuits details, refer to either

the relevant diagnostic section or Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

CIRCUIT OPERATION

SRS Serial Data Bus (Serial Data)

(Refer to Fig. 12J-2-94)

In the event of SRS deployment, the SDM will send serial data via the serial data bus to the BCM, where a physical

link to the serial data auxiliary bus enables the SDM to advise various systems, via serial data, to take appropriate

action. This includes the BCM.

Figure 12J-2-94

2. SERVICE OPERATIONS

2.1 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES

1. Whenever performing any electric welding on a vehicle, disconnect wiring harness connectors from the BCM.

2. Never subject the BCM to temperatures above 85°C, (eg. paint oven), always remove BCM first if this

temperature is to be exceeded.

3. Ensure that all wiring harness connectors are connected solidly and that battery terminals are thoroughly clean.

4. When charging the battery, disconnect it from the vehicle's electrical system.

5. Never connect or disconnect the BCM wiring harness connectors when the ignition is switched ON.

6. Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system while the engine is running.

7. Reconnecting battery cable terminals to the battery will cause a reset.

Following a BCM reset, the rear light failure warning system relearn procedure, headlight automatic off delay

period and power antenna height memory setting must be carried out. Refer to the various procedures in this

Section.

2.2 HIGH SERIES BCM

REMOVE

1. Disconnect battery earth lead.

2. Remove right hand instrument panel lower trim assembly, refer to Section 1A3 INSTRUMENT PANEL.

3. Remove BCM from mounting brackets by pushing the bottom of the BCM towards the front of the vehicle until

the BCM disengages from the lower mounting bracket. Then by grasping the BCM, gently pull the BCM down

(remembering that the wiring harnesses are still connected), disengaging the BCM from the upper mounting

bracket. Refer to Fig. 12J-2-95.

Figure 12J-2-95

4. Depress tangs on wiring harness connectors on BCM and pull connectors from module.

NOTE:

If carrying out BCM diagnostic checks as described in the appropriate diagnostic test in this Section, leave all wiring

harness connectors installed in the BCM. If required, reconnect battery earth lead.

REINSTALL

Installation of the BCM is the reverse of the removal procedure, ensuring that the BCM is firmly installed in the BCM

mounting brackets.

NOTE:

If the BCM is replaced, the new BCM must be security linked to the PCM as per the following procedure. If this

procedure is not performed, the vehicle will not crank.

BCM LINK TO PCM

Connect TECH 2 to DLC and select the following:

Diagnostics / (V) 1997 / VT Commodore / Body / Body Control Module / Security / BCM Link to PCM and follow

TECH instructions.

For additional information regarding TECH 2 and TECH 2 test modes (including this linking procedure), refer to

3. TECH 2 DIAGNOSIS FOR BCM in this Section.

Techline

2.3 REMOTE CODE D KEY

PERFORMANCE CHECK

During a performance check of the remote coded

key, be sure to check all keys that are assigned to

the vehicle.

Two checks have been inc or porated in the TECH 2

software. These two checks include a REMOTE

KEY SIGNAL test that is used for checking the RF

output and if the signal is recognised by the BCM.

The second check is the REMOTE KEY I.D. which

is used to check if a remote coded key has been

assigned to the BCM.

For more details on these TECH 2 checks, refer to

3.3 TECH 2 TEST MODES AND DISPLAYS FOR

BCM DIAGNOSIS in this Section.

Check that the remote coded key can successfully

lock and unlock the doors at a distance of

approximately four meters from the vehicle.

If one remote coded key fails to make the system

respond, the problem is in that particular remote

coded key.

After replacing a key due to a suspected

discharged or faulty battery, f irst insert the k ey into

the ignition and cycle from O FF - ON - O FF . T h is is

necessary as there may be a need to synchronise

the rolling codes between the remote coded key

and the BCM. If the codes are not synchronised,

the remote control of the central door locking

system will not work.

REPLACE

NOTE 1:

Before replacing a suspected faulty remote control

key, ensure the following steps are carried out.

• Carry out the Remote Control Function Fault

Diagnosis as per the diagnostic chart in this

Section.

• If the key still presents a problem, ensure that

the key pin is making contact with the remote

coded key reader assembly. Insert the key into

the ignition and cycle from OFF - ON - OFF.

This is necessary as there may be a need to

synchronise the rolling codes between the

remote control key and the BCM. The key

cycled in the ignition must be done with the thef t

deterrent alert indicator LED flashing (passively

armed). The remote coded key would only be

considered f aulty if it will not allow the engine to

start when used in the ignition switch with the

theft deterrent system armed (LED flashing),

refer 4.4 THEFT DETERRENT in this Section.

Avoid testing the remote coded key with the system

disarmed (LED not flashing), in this situation, a

faulty remote coded key will allow the engine to

start, being in the 30 second time frame before

the system passively arms itself.

Techline

NOTE 2:

Replacement of a remote coded key will

necessitate programming with the BCM to accept

the new remote coded key serial output data. The

program ming of the rem ote coded key can only be

performed by an authorised Holden service outlet

or authorised locksmiths when provided with the

correct security information .

1. Loosen and rem ove the two remote coded k ey

housing screws.

2. Grab hold of k ey tip and pull it from the rem ote

coded key housing.

3. W hile holding new remote coded key housing,

loosen and remove the remote coded key

housing screws. Assemble the key into the

new remote coded key housing.

4. Insert the two remote coded key housing

screws and start threads by hand. Tighten

screws to the correct torque specification (to

complete earth circuit within key).

REMOTE CODED KEY

HOUSING SCREW

TORQUE SPECIFICATION 0.7 - 0.9 Nm

5. Carry out programming of remote coded key.

6. Insert remote coded key into the ignition and

cycle from OFF - ON - OFF to synchronise

codes.

7. Carry out check of theft deterrent and central

door locking systems using the remote coded

key.

NOTE 3:

The rem ote control key is a sealed for lif e unit (non

removable battery), therefore the housing cannot

be separated. The battery life expectancy is

approximately five to ten years.

NOTE 4:

To protect the electric door lock actuators from

overheating if/when the door locks are operated

repeatedly in succession, the BCM is programmed

to prevent door lock operation for a short period

(maximum 20 seconds). This is normal operation

and not to be confused as a defective remote

coded key or BCM.

NOTE 5:

When a new remote key is programmed, it is

assigned sole use of one of the “priority one” key

memories. All remaining remote keys become

“priority two” keys. Old remote keys can be re-

assigned as the “priority one” through TECH 2.

2.4 RE MOTE CODED KEY READER

REMOVE

1. Release steering column height adjuster lever

and completely lower steering column, lock

lever in this position.

CAUTION:

Disable the SRS (Air Bag), refer to Section 12M

SUPPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM.

2. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.

3. Remove steering column upper and lower

covers, refer to Section 9A STEERING.

4. Disconnect wiring harness connector and

ignition lock illumination socket and bulb from

key reader assembly, then carefully pull key

reader assembly from ignition lock assembly

housing.

Figure 12J-2-96

REINSTALL

Installation of the remote key reader assembly is

the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the

following points:

1. Align the flat sections of the remote key reader

assembly with the ignition lock assembly, refer

to Fig. 12J-2-97

Figure 12J-2-97

2. Gently press key reader assembly onto ignition

lock by pushing on the centre of the key reader,

in between the two contact strips, until key seats

onto the ignition lock, refer to Fig. 12J-2-98.

3. Ensure that the wiring harness connector and

ignition lock illumination bulb and socket are

securely fitted onto key reader assembly.

4. On completion of reinstallation, insert the

ignition key and check the key reader assembly

operation.

NOTE:

Enable the SRS (Air Bag), refer to Section 12M

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM.

Figure 12J-2-98

Techline

2.5 DOOR LOCK ACTUATORS

For the procedure on how to remove, reinstall and test the door lock actuators, refer to Section 1A5 FRONT AND

REAR DOOR ASSEMBLIES.

2.6 DOOR LOCK MICROSW ITCHES

On VT Series Models, there are two door lock microswitches that are fitted to the drivers door exterior handle. The

microswitches are part of the driver’s door exterior handle assembly and are not serviced separately. Therefore, to

remove the exterior door handle and microswitch assembly, refer to Section 1A5 FRONT AND REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

TEST

1. Remove door inner trim panel, refer to

Section 1A5 FRONT AND REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

2. Using an ohmmeter connected to the

various terminals, check operation of the

microswitches as per the following table:

NOTE:

If any of the readings are not as specif ied, replace

the exterior door handle and micr oswitch as s embly,

refer to Section 1A5 FRONT AND REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Figure 12J-2-99

LOCK POSITION TERMINALS (WIRE COLOURS) VALUE

Rest position Brown/Red to Brown/White

Brown/Red to Brown

Brown/White to Brown

Open circuit

Held in lock position Brown/Red to Brown

Brown/Red to Brown/White Continuity

Open circuit

Held in unlock position Brown/Red to Brown/White

Brown/Red to Brown Continuity

Open circuit

2.7 TAILGATE & REAR COMPARTMENT LID ACTUATORS

For the Procedure on how to remove and reinstall the tailgate lock actuator and rear compartment deck lid actuator,

refer to Section 1A4 REAR COMPARTMENT LID AND TAILGATE.

2.8 THEFT DETERRENT LED

The theft deterrent LED is incorporated into the trip computer module in the instrument panel facia and therefore,

not serviced separately. For the Procedure on how to remove and reinstall the trip computer module, refer to

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPERS, WASHERS & HORN.

2.9 DOOR JAMB SWITCHES

The door j am b switches are installed in each of the

door hinge pillars. W hen the door of the vehicle is

closed, a plunger in the switch is depressed,

creating an open circuit in the earth circuit. When

the door is opened, the plunger is released and

completes the circuit to earth.

REMOVE

1. Remove door jamb switch retaining screw (1).

2. Remove door jamb switch (2) from door hinge

pillar, taking care not to damage the door jamb

switch wiring harness.

3. Disconnect wiring harness connectors.

Figure 12J-2-100

REINSTALL

Installation of the door j amb switches is the rever s e

of the removal procedure.

2.10 HEADLAMP SWITCH

For the procedure on how to remove, test and reinstall the headlamp switch, refer to Section 12B LIGHTING

SYSTEMS.

2.11 HEADLAMP AND PARK LAMP RELAYS

Fig. 12J-2-101 shows the location of the park lamp

relay (located inside the vehicle, attached to the

fuse panel).

Access to the relay / fuse panel is by lowering the

instrument panel right hand cover assembly. Refer

to Section 1A3 INSTRUMENT PANEL for the

procedure on how to remove this cover.

Figure 12J-2-101

Fig. 12J-2-102 shows the location of the headlamp

high and low beam relays (located inside the

engine compartment relay housing).

Figure 12J-2-102

2.12 S UN SENSOR / REMOTE RE CE IVER MODULE

REMOVE

1. Remove LH and RH demist grilles, refer to

Section 1A3 INSTRUMENT PANEL.

2. Gently pry the f ront of the sun sens or / remote

receiver module up and towards rear of

vehicle.

Figure 12J-2-103

3. Disconnect wiring harness connector.

4. Remove wiring harnes s retaining clip fr om sun

sensor / r emote receiver module by squeezing

tangs of clip together and pushing clip through

sun sensor / remote receiver module aperture.

5. Remove sun sensor / remote receiver module.

REINSTALL

Installation of the sun sensor / remote receiver

module is the reverse of the removal procedure.

NOTE:

To program the sensitivity of the twilight sentinel,

refer to 3.3 TECH 2 TEST MODES AND

DISPLAYS FOR BCM DIAGNSOSIS in this

Section.

Figure 12J-2-104

2.13 REAR COMPARTMENT LAMP SWITCH

REMOVE

NOTE:

The rear compartment lamp switch for sedan and

wagon models are the same except for the

location. The switch for sedan models is located in

the deck lid, to the right of the deck lid lock. The

switch for wagon models is located in the tailgate

assem bly, to the left of the tailgate loc k. Fig. 12J- 2-

105 shows the switch for sedan models

1. Remove rear compartment lamp switch

retaining screw.

2. Remove rear compartment lamp switch from

deck lid / tailgate, taking care not to dam age the

switches wiring harness.

3. Disconnect wiring harness and remove switch. Figure 12J-2-105

REINSTALL

Installation of the rear compartment lamp switch is

the reverse of the removal procedure.

2.14 HOOD SWITCH

REMOVE

1. Remove hood switch retaining screw.

2. Remove hood s witch from support panel, taking

care not to damage the hood switch wiring

harness.

3. Disconnect wiring harness and remove switch.

Figure 12J-2-106

REINSTALL

Installation of the hood switch is the reverse of the

removal procedure.

NOTE:

The hood switch contacts are opened when the

hood is closed. This is accomplished by an

adjustable rubber stopper that is screwed into the

engine hood.

With the engine hood closed, the rubber stopper

must be adjusted so as to depress the switch

plunger.

Figure 12J-2-107

2.15 HORNS

Horn/s for VT Series Models are mounted on the

right hand front wheelhouse panel, behind the f ront

bumper bar assembly. For the Procedure on how

to remove, test and reinstall these horns, refer to

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

On vehicles with the High Series BCM, an

additional theft deterrent horn is fitted inside the

engine compartment, behind the left hand strut

tower. For the procedure on how to remove and

reinstall this horn, refer to the following:

REMOVE

1. Disconnect theft deterrent horn wiring harness

connector.

2. Remove theft deterrent horn retaining screw

and remove horn assembly.

Figure 12J-2-108

TEST

For the Procedure on how to test the thef t deter rent

horn, refer to Section 12C INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

REINSTALL

Installation of the theft deterrent hor n is the rever se

of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1. Ensure connector is installed correctly.

2. Ensure theft deterrent horn retaining screw is

tightened to the correct torque specification.

THEFT DETERRENT HORN

RETAINING SCREW 20 - 27 Nm

TORQUE SPECIFICATION

2.16 HORN RELAY

Fig. 12J-2-109 shows the location of the horn

relays (located inside the engine compartment relay

housing).

Figure 12J-2-109

2.17 IGNITION SWITCH

For the Procedure on how to remove and reinstall the ignition switch, refer to Section 9A STEERING.

2.18 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

For vehicle speed sensor removal, testing and reinstallation instructions, refer to Section 12C INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

For vehicle speed sensor removal, testing and reinstallation instructions, refer to Section 6C1 POWERTAIN

MANAGEMENT - V6 or Section 6C2 POWERTAI N MANAGEMENT - V8.

2.19 P O WER WINDOW MOTORS

For the procedure on how to remove and reinstall the power window motors, refer to Section 1A5 FRONT AND

REAR DOORS.

2.20 FRONT AND REAR DOOR POWER WINDOW S WITCH

REMOVE

1. Raise the centre console cap, refer to

Section 1A3 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND

CONSOLE.

2. From the rear of the centre console cap, push

the tangs securing the power window switch and

push the power window switch upward,

releasing it from the console cap.

3. Depress wiring harness retaining tang and

disconnect wiring harness connector, remove

power window switch.

Figure 12J-2-110

TEST

NOTE:

Do not allow skin to contact the power window

circuit board when checking for continuity With the

power window switch rem oved, using an ohmm eter

connected to the various terminals, check operation

of the switch as per the following table:

NOTE:

If any of the readings are not as specified, replace

the power window switch assembly.

Figure 12J-2-111

Techline

SWITCH

POSITION TERMINAL

NUMBERS VALUE

RHF Up

Rest

Down

4 and 9

5 and 8

5 and 9

4 and 8

Continuity

LHF Up

Rest

Down

4 and 14

5 and 1

5 and 14

4 and 1

Continuity

RHR Up

Rest

Down

4 and 7

5 and 6

5 and 7

4 and 6

Continuity

LHR Up

Rest

Down

4 and 3

5 and 2

5 and 3

4 and 2

Continuity

OverrideIn

Switch Out 4 and 13

4 and 13 Open circuit

Continuity

REINSTALL

Installation of the f r ont and r ear door power window

switch is the reverse of the removal procedure.

2.21 REAR DOOR POWER WINDOW S WITCHES

REMOVE

1. From the rear of the rear door power window

switch, prise the appropriate switch from the

door trim, taking care not to damage door trim.

2. Lift out rear door power window switch from

door trim until wiring harness connector passes

out through console opening.

3. Depress wiring harness retaining tang and

disconnect wiring harness connector, remove

switch.

Figure 12J-2-112

SWITCH

POSITION TERMINAL

NUMBERS VALUE

Up 1 and 3

2 and 4 Continuity

Continuity

Rest 1 and 3

2 and 5 Continuity

Continuity

Down 1 and 3

2 and 5 Continuity

Continuity

TEST

NOTE:

Do not allow skin to contact the power window

circuit board when checking for continuity.

With the power window switch removed, using an

ohmmeter connected to the various terminals,

check operation of the switch as per the following

table:

NOTE:

If any of the readings are not as specified, replace

the power window sw itch assembly.

Figure 12J-2-113

REINSTALL

Installation of the rear door power window switch is

the reverse of the removal procedure.

2.22 POWER WINDOW RELAYS AND CIRCUIT BREAKER

Fig. 12J-2-114 shows the location of the power

window relays and circuit breaker (located inside

the vehicle, attached to the fuse panel).

Access to the relay / fuse panel is by lowering the

instrument panel right hand cover assembly. Refer

to Section 1A3 INSTRUMENT PANEL for the

procedure on how to remove this cover.

Figure 12J-2-114

2.23 ENGINE COOLING FAN LOW SPEED RELAY

Fig. 12J-2-115 shows the location of the engine

cooling low speed fan relay (located inside the

engine compartment relay housing).

Figure 12J-2-115

2.24 W I NDSHIELD WIPE R MOTOR

For windshield wiper motor removal, testing and Installation instructions, refer to Section 12C INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

2.25 WINDSHIELD WI P ER/WASHER SWITCH

For the windshield wiper/washer switch removal, testing and installation instructions, refer to

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

2.26 POWER STEERING SOLENOID

For all service operations on removing, testing and reinstalling the power steering solenoid or steering gear, refer to

Section 9B SPEED SENSITIVE POWER STEERING.

2.27 P O WER ANTENNA CONTROL

For all service operations on removing, testing and reinstalling the power antenna control switch, refer to

Section 12D AUDIO SYSTEM.

2.28 INS TRUMENT ILLUMINATION DIMME R CONTROL SWITCH

The dimmer control switch is incorporated with into the headlamp switch assembly. For headlamp switch removal,

testing and Installation instructions, refer to Section 12B LIGHTING SYSTEM.

2.29 PARK AND STOP LAMP FUSES

Fig. 12J-2-116 shows the location of the park and

stop lamp fuses (located inside the vehicle,

attached to the fuse panel).

Access to the relay / fuse panel is by lowering the

instrument panel right hand cover assembly. Refer

TO Section 1A3 INSTRUMENT PANEL for the

procedure on how to remove this cover.

Figure 12J-2-116

2.30 RE AR LAMP FAILURE WARNING LAMP

The rear lamp failure warning lamp is located in the instrument cluster warning lamp cluster. For bulb replacement

procedures, refer to Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

2.31 STOP LAMP SWITCH

The stop lamp switch is attached to the brake pedal support. For stop lamp switch removal, testing and installation

instructions, refer to Section 12B LIGHTING SYSTEM.

3. TECH 2 DIAGNOSIS FOR BCM

3.1 BASIC KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED

Before attempting to diagnose the control or assist of the various vehicle electrical systems controlled by the BCM,

you must have a good understanding of electrical system basics and the use of circuit testing tools. Without this

basic knowledge it will be difficult to use the diagnostic procedures detailed in this Section.

Some electrical basics, troubleshooting procedures and hints as well as the use of circuit testing tools are covered

in Section 12P WIRING DIAGRAMS.

Basic Electrical Circuits - You should understand the basic theory of electricity, series and parallel circuits, and

voltage drops across series resistors. You should know the meaning of voltage (volts), current (amps), and

resistance (ohms). You should understand what happens in a circuit with an open or shorted wire (shorted either to

voltage or earth). You should also be able to read and understand a wiring diagram.

Use of Circuit Testing Tools - You should know how to use a jumper lead to test circuits. You should be familiar with

the use of a high input impedance (10 Meg ohm) digital type multimeter such as tool No. J39200 or equivalent and

be able to measure voltage, current, and resistance. You should be familiar with the proper use of the TECH 2

Diagnostic Scan Tool.

3.2 CONNECTING TE CH 2

TECH 2, with the appropriate software, cables and

adaptors, when connected to the Data Link

Connector (DLC) is capable of reading BCM serial

data. The DLC is connected to the instrument panel

lower right hand trim, to the right of the steering

column.

For additional general information on connecting

and operating TECH 2 , refer to

Section 0C TECH 2.

Figure 12J-2-117

TECH 2 has seven test modes for diagnosing the

BCM. The seven test modes are as follows:

Mode F0: Normal Mode

In this mode, the Tech 2 monitors the

communication between control modules on the

serial data line. The information displayed on the

TECH 2 screen in this mode is what the BCM is

communicating to the other modules via the serial

data line.

Mode F1: Diagnostic Trouble Codes

In this test mode, current Diagnos tic Trouble Codes

(DT C’s) s tored in the c ontrol modules m em or y may

be displayed or cleared.

Additionally, in this mode, entry deterrent alarm

codes, stored in the control modules memory can

be displayed and cleared.

Mode F2: Data Display

In this test mode, TECH 2 displays the status of

inputs and outputs of the BCM.

Mode F3: Snapshot

In this test mode, Tech 2 captures BCM data

before and after a forced manual trigger.

Mode F4: Miscellaneous Tests

In this test mode, Tech 2 performs various

functional tests to assist in pr oblem isolation during

trouble shooting.

Mode F5: Program

In this test mode, Tech 2 allows the programming

of various features by turning the feature OFF or

ON, or adjusting settings (ie. twilight sentinel

sensitivity).

Mode F6: Security

In this test m ode, T ech 2 pr ovides the user with the

capability of: linking the PCM to the BCM, reading

security information (ie. radio pin numbers), and

programming security features (ie. keys).

Figure 12J-2-118

3.3 TECH 2 TEST MODES AND DISPLAYS FOR BCM DIAGNOSIS

As a prerequisite to this diagnostic section is for the

user to be familiar with the proper use of TECH 2,

the following illustrates only the major TECH 2

screen displays and provide a brief explanation of

their function for diagnosing the BCM. If additional

information is r equired on the oper ation of TECH 2,

reference should be made to either Section 0C

TECH 2 or the TECH 2 OPERATORS MANUAL.

System Select Menu

W ith TECH 2 c onnected to the DLC and turned on,

F0: DIAGNOSTICS selected from the MAIN

MENU, the correct MODEL YEAR and VEHICLE

TYPE must be selected for access to the SYSTEM

SELECT MENU.

Select F3: BODY.

This mode contains all functions to test, diagnose,

monitor and program the vehicles body systems

including the BCM as well as providing the

opportunity to check all DTC’s that may be set in

the vehicle.

Figure 12J-2-119

Body Application Menu

Once F3: BO DY has been selec ted from the s elect

menu, BCM can be selected.

Select Body Control Module and press enter to

continue.

NOTE:

If inform ation regarding DT C’s set for the vehicle is

required, select DTC CHECK and press enter to

continue. To return to the BCM mode option from

the DTC CHECK mode option screen display,

simply press the EXIT key on TECH 2.

Once the BCM has been selec ted and entered, the

following two SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION screens

will appear which require action. Figure 12J-2-120

System Identification

Turn the ignition ON (as requested) and press

CONFIRM soft key to continue.

Figure 12J-2-121

The SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION screen will then

display the control module level and type. Press the

CONFIRM soft key to continue to the BCM

APPLICATION MENU.

Figure 12J-2-122

Application Menu

The following functions will now be available:

F0: Normal Mode

F1: Diagnostic Trouble Codes

F2: Data display

F3: Snapshot

F4: Miscellaneous Tests

F5: Program

F6: Security

Figure 12J-2-123

F0: NORMAL MODE

In the F0: Normal Mode, information that the BCM is communicating to other control modules, via the serial data

line, is displayed.

The table below lists each item in the Normal Mode, together with a brief description of its meaning.

DATA STREAM /

SCREEN DISPLAY DESCRIPTION EXPECTED READING

Ignition Status Displays current state of

ignition switch as sensed by

the BCM.

On 12 volts / Off 0 volts

Ignition Off Time Displays the length of time

since the ignition was last

switched off.

XX minutes

Instrument Lamps Displays instrument

illumination level. 0 % / 100 %

Lights On Displays current status of

headlamp switch. Yes / No

Ambient Light Level Displays the ambient light

level from the sun load

sensor / remote receiver.

Between 0 and 254

Boot Status Displays boot switch status. Open / Closed

Rear Lamp Status Displays rear lamp circuit

status (including bulb

condition). If a fault is

detected in the circuit,

Service Request will be

displayed.

Okay / Service Request

Front Wiper Status Displays front wiper drive

status. On / Off

Front Auto Wiper Status This feature is unavailable

at present. Off

Cruise Control Input

Signal Displays status of cruise

control. On / Off

A/C Request (Air

Conditioning) This feature is not

applicable to high series

vehicles (with ECC),

therefore, will always

display OFF.

On / Off

BCM Lower Fan Drive Displays low speed fan

drive status. On / Off

BCM Chime (Body

Control Module) Displays status of BCM

chime. On / Off

Key User Displays priority key in use. 1 / 2

BCM DTC Status Display will advise if any

BCM DTC's are set. No DTC’s / DTC’s Set

F1: DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

The following functions will be available in this

mode:

Read Current DTC Information - a listing of all (if

any) current DT C’s that have been set by the BCM

will be displayed. A short description of what the

DTC is, is also displayed in this mode.

Read Alarm Code Information - a description of

stored alarm codes (if any) will be displayed.

Clear DTC Information - simply select CLEAR

CODES, press the ENTER button on TECH 2 and

confirm the action as instructed by TECH 2.

Performing this function will also alarm codes.

The following chart sets out all the possible BCM

DTC’s as indicated by TECH 2.

Refer to the relevant diagnostic chart in this Section

when attempting rectification of a system problem

or failure.

Figure 12J-2-124

BCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

DTC CODE DESCRIPTION REFER

1Output overload - sets if the BCM

output protection circuitry detects

an output driver overload. This will

cause all BCM output drives to be

set to the inactive state. The BCM

will then attempt to drive all outputs

approximately every 10ms, thus

causing all active BCM output

drives to repeatedly switch from an

active to an inactive state until the

fault condition is remedied.

NOTE:

The BCM is unable to identify which

output is being overloaded.

This DTC can be set by any one of the

BCM outputs being shorted to battery

positive, therefore, if DTC 1 is set, refer to

section relevant to driver complaint (if

any).

For a listing of all BCM outputs, refer to

the HIGH SERIES BCM TERMINAL

IDENTIFICATION chart in 1 GENERAL

DESCRIPTION in this Section.

NOTE:

DTC 1 can also be set by electrical

transients, therefore, if DTC 1 is set and

there are no noticeable problems with the

vehicle, clear DTC and check function of

BCM outputs. If DTC does not reset and

BCM outputs are functioning correctly,

disregard DTC 1

2Slip Ring Failure - sets if the

number of failed slip ring reads

exceeds a programmable

percentage of all slip ring reads

(approximately 18 failed slip ring

reads out of 100 good slip ring

reads).

4.4 THEFT DETERRENT, in this Section

to rectify problem.

3Power steering Open Circuit -

sets when the feedback from the

BCM commanded power steering

current is less than the desired

value by more than 25% of the

minimum achievable current.

4.12 SPEED SENSITIVE POWER

STEERING, in this Section to rectify this

problem.

4Power Steering Short Circuit -

sets whenever the power steering

current feedback circuit detects a

current in excess of that

commanded by the BCM.

4.12 SPEED SENSITIVE POWER

STEERING, in this Section to rectify this

problem.

5Tail Lamp Failure - sets when the

BCM detects a tail lamp failure that

turns the rear light failure warning

lamp ON in the instrument cluster.

4.16 REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING

SYSTEM, in this Section to rectify the

problem.

BCM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

DTC CODE DESCRIPTION REFER

6Stop Lamp Failure - sets when the

BCM detects a stop lamp fail that

turns the rear light failure warning

lamp ON in the instrument cluster.

4.16 REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING

SYSTEM, in this Section to rectify the

problem.

7PCM Data Lost - sets when the

BCM does not receive responses

from the PCM or receives

incorrectly formatted responses

from the PCM within three seconds

of normal serial data bus activity.

The three second time out period is

reset whenever the following

conditions occur:

• Ignition switched from OFF to

ON.

• A good PCM poll response is

received from the PCM.

• A key has been programmed.

• BCM has just been reset.

4.2 SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATION, in

this Section to rectify problem.

8PCM Vehicle Speed Data

Unstable - sets if the BCM receives

two consecutive road speed

updates from the PCM with a

magnitude difference of 30 km/h.

4.12 SPEED SENSITIVE POWER

STEERING (steps 10 & 11), in this

Section to rectify problem.

17 Serial Data Bus Fault - sets if the

BCM cannot detect six consecutive

messages on the serial data bus.

This trouble code indicates either a

short circuit on the bus or if two or

more modules send a message at

the same time.

4.2 SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATION, in

this Section to rectify problem.

F2: DATA DISPLAY

In this test mode, TECH 2 checks if the BCM is actually receiving an input or inputs from the appropriate sensor/s or

actuator/s for the system being diagnosed, eg. for power antenna mast adjustment, check that the radio on, power

antenna up or down switch inputs are being received.

If the sensor/s or actuator/s input/s are not being received, then carry out the relevant system diagnosis as defined

in this Section.

If the sensor/s or actuator/s input/s are being received, go to the appropriate F4: BCM TEST mode to command the

BCM via TECH 2 to operate the system output.

Should the system output or actuator not function correctly, conduct relevant system diagnosis as defined in this

Section. If system wiring and output actuator are OK, replace BCM.

A description explaining the display and, where applicable, affected terminals is included in the charts below.

NOTE:

When the TECH 2 is communicating with the BCM, it also determines what type of BCM is fitted to the vehicle and

therefore only the relevant data list and functional tests will be displayed.

DATA LIST

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

BCM LEVEL Displays what level of BCM is fitted to the vehicle.

The screen should display LUX on Berlina Models

and HIGH on Calais.

If fuse F31 or circuits 740 and/or 1040 are open

circuited, communication with the BCM will not be

possible. If these circuits are OK, refer to 4.2 SERIAL

DATA COMMUNICATION in this Section.

BCM TYPE Displays w hat type of BCM is fitted to the vehicle.

The screen will display the type of BCM fitted to the

vehicle (TYPE 1).

If fuse F31 or circuits 740 and/or 1040 are open

circuited, communication with the BCM will not be

possible. If these circuits are OK, refer to 4.2 SERIAL

DATA COMMUNICATION, in this Section.

BATTERY

VOLTAGE Displays battery voltage input to BCM.

If fuse F31 or circuits 740 and/or 1040 are open

circuited, communication with the BCM will not be

possible.

VEHICLE

SPEED Displays vehicle speed input to BCM via the main

SDI (circuit 1221).

If vehicle speed cannot be displayed, refer to 4.11

ROADSPEED DEPENDENT VARIABLE DWELL

WIPER SYSTEM (Steps 51 and 55) diagnosis in this

Section.

SLIP RING

ENABLED Screen display may flash from NO to YES briefly

when BCM receives a correct key reading. If BCM

does not receive a correct key reading, screen will

flash between NO YES continuously until a correct

reading is achieved.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.4

THEFT DETERRENT in this Section.

IGNITION

SWITCH Displays current state of ignition switch as sensed by

the BCM.

Will display ON with ignition switch in IGN or START

positions and OFF in ACC or OFF positions.

If screen display doesn’t change as described, check

circuitry between ignition switch and BCM, and

ignition switch contacts. If circuit and switch are OK,

BCM is faulty.

E20

ACCESSORY

SWITCH Displays current state of accessory switch as sensed

by the BCM.

Will display ON with ignition switch in ACC or IGN

positions and OFF in START or OFF positions.

If screen display doesn’t change as described, check

circuitry between ignition switch and BCM, and

ignition switch contacts. If circuit and switch are OK,

BCM is faulty.

E17

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

CENTRAL

LOCKING Displays the current state of the BCM internal central

door locking relays.

When locking the central door locking system, either

remotely or by turning the RH door key switch, the

screen display changes to ALL LOCK. If the RH door

key switch is activated a second time, the screen will

display DEADLOCKED.

When unlocking the system by turning the RHF door

key switch, the screen display changes from ALL

LOCKED or DEADLOCKED to ALL UNLOCK.

Unlocking remotely, the screen display changes from

ALL LOCKED or DEADLOCKED to DRIVER

UNLOCK on first press (If vehicle is programmed with

two stage unlocking) and second button press, the

screen displays ALL UNLOCK.

If screen display does not change as described, refer

to 4.3 CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING and carry out

FUNCTIONAL CHECK - CENTRAL DOOR

LOCKING.

DRIVER’S

DOOR

UNLOCK

SWITCH

Displays RHF door lock actuator key switch input to

BCM.

With doors locked, screen displays OFF, unlocking

the driver’s door or all doors, screen will change to

ON.

If the circuit from BCM terminal C20 is open circuited,

the passenger’s doors cannot be unlocked by the

RHF door lock key switch.

C20

PASSENGER’S

DOOR

UNLOCK

SWITCH

Displays passenger door lock actuator switch inputs

to the BCM.

With doors locked, screen displays OFF, unlocking

the passenger doors, screen changes to ON.

If the circuit from BCM terminal C9 is open circuited,

the passenger doors cannot be unlocked. The screen

display w ill also remain unchanged.

LOCK SWITCH

STATUS Displays the front doors lock actuator inputs to the

BCM.

When doors are locked, by activating either of the

front door lock actuators (snib), screen displays ON.

When doors are unlocked, screen displays OFF.

If circuit is open, doors can not be locked from the

front door lock actuators (snib), but system can be

locked remotely.

If screen display does not change as described, refer

to 4.3 CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING and carry out

FUNCTIONAL CHECK - CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING

in this Section.

C21

DEADLOCK

SWITCH Displays RHF door lock microswitch input to BCM.

With RHF door lock cylinder in the unlocked and

locked position, screen displays OFF. Display will

change to DEADLOCK when the door lock cylinder is

turned to the deadlock position.

If circuit 197 is open circuited, doors cannot be locked

or deadlocked by turning the RHF door lock cylinder

and screen display will remain off. However, doors

can be locked remotely.

If screen display does not change as described, refer

to 4.3 CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING and carry out

FUNCTIONAL CHECK - CENTRAL DOOR

LOCKING, in this Section.

C22

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

ILLUMINATION

SWITCH

POSITION

Displays instrument dimmer slide control input to

BCM.

With the ignition OFF, parking lamps OFF and

dimming switch control lever at the rest position,

screen displays OFF.

With the ignition and park lamps on and the control

lever held up, screen displays UP. With switch control

lever held down, screen displays DOWN.

If circuit 717 between BCM terminal E11 and

headlamp switch is open circuited, the screen will not

change and screen display will remain OFF.

If screen displays are not as described, refer to 4.15

INSTRUMENT DIMMING CONTROL in this Section.

E11

ILLUMINATION

VOLTAGE Displays instrument dimmer slide control input

voltage to BCM.

With the parking lamps ON and dimming switch

control lever at the rest position, screen displays 3.5

volts.

With the control lever held in the up position, screen

displays 0.2 volts. With the switch control lever in the

down position, the screen displays 2.2 volts.

If screen displays are not as described, refer to 4.15

INSTRUMENT DIMMING CONTROL in this Section.

E11

INSTRUMENT

LAMPS With ignition OFF and parking or headlamps OFF,

screen displays 100%, irrespective of switch control

lever position. With ignition ON and parking lamps off,

screen displays 100%, irrespective of switch control

lever position as the trip computer display in the

instrument cluster is illuminated.

With the ignition ON, Parking lamps ON and switch

control lever in the up position, the percentage of

instrument cluster illumination intensity will increase

to 100% (if not already at 100%).

Holding switch control lever down, screen will

gradually decrease to approximately 35%.

If circuit 717 between BCM terminal E11 and

headlamp switch is open circuited, the screen will not

change and screen display will remain OFF.

If screen displays are not as described, refer to 4.15

INSTRUMENT DIMMING CONTROL in this Section.

E11

DOME SWITCH Displays dome lamp switch input to BCM.

With dome lamp switch in off, screen displays OFF,

changes to ON when switch is turned ON, and

changes to DOOR when switch is turned to the door

position.

If circuit 174 between the BCM, terminal C24 and the

interior lighting is open circuited, the interior lighting

will not come on.

If screen display does not change as described, refer

to 4.14 DOME LAMP DELAY CONTROL in this

Section.

C24

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

DOME LAMP

DRIVE Display changes from OFF to ON as dome lamp is

turned ON or when the remote coded key UNLOCK

button is depressed. Display goes OFF when the

ignition is turned ON. This check confirms if the BCM

internal circuitry is operating (a relay within the BCM

will be heard to click as the drive is turned on).

If circuit 174 between the BCM, terminal C24 and the

interior lighting is open circuited, the interior lighting

will not come on.

If screen display does not change as described, refer

to 4.14 DOME LAMP DELAY CONTROL in this

Section.

C24

LIGHTS OFF

DELAY Displays programmed automatic headlamps delay

period, if set (will display 0 sec. If not set). Refer to

1.7 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL / A UTOMA TIC

LIGHTS OFF (WITHOUT TWILIGHT SENTINEL) in

this Section.

If delay period will not set, refer to 4.9 AUTOMATIC

LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF

(WITHOUT TWILIGHT SENTINEL) in this Section.

HEADLAMP

SWITCH Displays status of switch during auto off period only .

Display changes from OFF to ON as headlamps auto

off period is in progress. This check confirms that the

BCM internal switching is operating. Display goes to

OFF when the headlamp auto off is cancelled.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.9

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS OFF (WITHOUT TWILIGHT SENTINEL) in

this Section.

E12, E28

HEADLAMP

DRIVE With the ignition turned on, screen displays ON,

turning the ignition off, the screen will still display ON.

Turn headlamps on, scroll ignition from on to off and

open the driver’s door, screen will change from ON to

OFF and headlights will go out.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.9

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS OFF (WITHOUT TWILIGHT SENTINEL) in

this Section.

E28

AMBIENT

LIGHT

SENSOR

Displays ambient light level input to BCM.

When ambient light sensor (sun sensor / remote

receiver module) is covered (dark), display will show

approximately 0 volts. With bright light (sun light or for

testing purposes, a torch), display will be up to 5

volts.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.9

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS OFF (WITHOUT TWILIGHT SENTINEL) in

this Section.

E10

TWILIGHT

LEVEL Displays the programmed level of sensitivity - may be

set between 0 and 7 (4 is the default setting in

production).

If screen display is not as described, refer to 4.10

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS ON AND OFF (WITH TWILIGHT

SENTINEL) in this Section.

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

TWILIGHT

SENTINEL Will display ON when BCM determines lights should

be turned on, regardless of headlamp position.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.10

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS ON AND OFF (WITH TWILIGHT

SENTINEL) in this Section.

E7, E10

DRIVERS

DOOR Displays the driver’s door jamb switch input to the

BCM.

When the driver’s door is open, the screen display

should be OPEN, and when the door is closed, the

screen should display CLOSED.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.4

THEFT DETERRENT in this Section.

PASSENGER

DOORS Displays the passenger’s door jamb switch input to

the BCM.

When the passenger’s door is open, the screen

display should be OPEN, and when the door is

closed, the screen should display CLOSED.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.5

ENTRY DETERRENT in this Section.

STOP LAMP

SWITCH Displays stop lamp switch input to BCM.

When brake pedal is depressed and the ignition is on,

screen display changes from OFF to ON.

If screen does not change as described, refer to

Section 12L ABS & ABS/ETC diagnostics.

E18

STOP LAMP

BULB

CONDITION

With ignition ON and brake pedal depressed, screen

should display Okay. If screen displays FAILED,

check stop lamp bulbs, wiring between stop lamp

switch and rear lamp connectors, and between rear

lamp connectors and BCM.

NOTE:

If at any time the BCM has been reset, a rear lamp

failure warning system bulb relearn procedure must

be performed (refer to 1.14 REAR LIGHT FAILURE

WARNING SYSTEM in this Section).

C15

STOP LAMP

FUSE Displays stop lamp fuse F5 input to BCM.

Screen should display Okay. If screen displays

FAILED, check fuse F5, wiring between fuse F5 and

battery, and between fuse F5 and BCM.

E18

PARK LAMP

FUSE Displays parking lamp fuse F4 input to BCM.

Screen should display Okay. If screen displays

FAILED, check fuse F4, wiring between fuse F4 and

battery, and fuse F4 and the BCM.

E24

PARK LAMP

SWITCH Displays parking lamps switch input to BCM.

When the parking lamps are switched on, screen

display changes from OFF to ON.

If screen does not change as described, check

headlamp switch contacts or open circuit in wiring to

BCM terminal E11, refer to Section 12B LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

E11

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

PARK LAMP

BULB

CONDITION

With ignition ON and parking lamps on, screen

should display Okay. If screen displays FAILED,

check rear parking lamp bulbs, wiring between

headlamp switch and rear lamp connectors, and

between rear lamp connectors and BCM.

NOTE:

If at any time the BCM has been reset, a rear lamp

failure warning system bulb relearn procedure must

be performed (refer to 1.14 REAR LIGHT FAILURE

WARNING SYSTEM in this Section).

E11, E28

BULB FAILED

WARNING

LAMP

Checks BCM internal switching for illuminating the

rear lamps failure warning lamp. The warning lamp

will illuminate whenever a fault is detected.

If lamp does not work , refer to Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS, WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

If screen display does not change as described, the

BCM is faulty.

LAMP CIRCUIT

CURRENT

STATUS

Will display OK if the BCM current flow is within

specifications. If current flow is higher than specified,

TECH 2 screen will display TOO HIGH. In this case,

check for installation of incorrect wattage rear lamp

bulbs, or causes of high current flow to rear lamps, ie.

Rear lamps shorted to together or shorted to earth.

STOP LAMP

CURRENT Displays current flow from rear lamps as detected by

the BCM.

With ignition off, parking lamps off and brake pedal

released, displays approximately 0.0 A.

With ignition off, parking lamps on and brake pedal

depressed, display s approximately 0.3 A.

With ignition off, parking lamps on and brake pedal

depressed, display s approximately 1.0 A.

C15

PARK LAMP

CURRENT Displays current flow from rear lamps as detected by

the BCM.

With ignition off, parking lamps off and brake pedal

released, displays approximately 0.0 A.

With ignition off, parking lamps on, displays

approximately 3.1 A.

With ignition off, parking lamps on and brake pedal

depressed, display s approximately 4.9 A.

With ignition off, parking lamps off and brake pedal

depressed, displays approximately 4.9A.

C15

FRONT

WASHER

PUMP SWITCH

Displays front washer pump switch input to BCM.

With ignition on and the washer pump switch

activated, screen display changes from OFF to ON.

If circuit 94, between the BCM and the wiper/washer

switch is open circuited, the wipe after wash function

will not operate.

If screen display does not change, check circuit 94

between BCM terminal E25 and wiper/washer switch

(including wiper/washer switch contacts), refer

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPER/WASHER &

HORN.

E25

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

WIPER PARK

SWITCH Displays input to BCM.

With wipers in the park position, screen displays ON.

With wipers operating, display will change to OFF and

momentarily go to ON as wipers operate through the

park region.

If circuit 196, between the BCM and the wiper motor

is open circuited, the screen will display ON all the

time and wipers will not park when turned off.

If screen display remains ON with wipers operating,

check for open circuit between BCM terminal B8 and

wiper motor, carry out checks of wiper motor, refer

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPER/WASHER &

HORN.

FRONT WIPER

INTERMITTENT

SWITCH

Displays wiper/washer switch intermittent switch

contacts input to BCM.

With ignition on and wiper/washer switch set to the

intermittent position, screen display changes to ON.

If circuit 97, between the BCM and the wiper/washer

switch is open circuited, there will be no intermittent

wiper function.

If screen display does not change, check circuit 97

between BCM terminal E27 and wiper/washer switch

(including wiper/washer switch contacts), refer

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPER/WASHER &

HORN.

E27

INTERMITTENT

WIPER

VOLTAGE

Displays intermittent wiper potentiometer setting input

to BCM.

Displays between 0.9 and 3.9 volts depending on

potentiometer setting.

If screen does not change when potentiometer is

adjusted, refer to Section 12C INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS/WASHERS & HORN.

INTERMITTENT

WIPER DRIVE With wipers operating in the intermittent mode,

screen displays ON. With wipers in the parked

position, and in 1st or 2nd speed, screen displays off.

If screen displays are not as described, refer to 4.11

ROADSPEED DEPENDENT VARIABLE DWELL

WIPER SYSTEM in this Section.

FRONT WIPER

DWELL TIME Displays wi per/washer switch dwell control

adjustment at BCM.

With vehicle stationary, display will change from

approximately 5.0 SEC (seconds) at fastest setting to

approximately 25 SEC (seconds) at its slowest

setting as dwell control switch is adjusted from one

extreme to the other.

If screen display doesn’t change, or displays 5.0 SEC

continuously, check circuit 96, between BCM terminal

E5 and wiper/washer switch (including wiper/washer

dwell control adjustment contacts, refer Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS, WIPER/WASHER & HORN.

FRONT AUTO

WIPER This feature is not implemented on VT Series

Models.

Screen will always display OFF.

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

REAR WASH

PUMP SWITCH Displays rear washer pump switch input to BCM.

With ignition on and the washer pump switch

activated, screen display changes from OFF to ON.

If circuit 494, between the BCM and the wiper/washer

switch is open circuited, the wipe after wash function

will not operate.

If screen display does not change, check circuit 494

between BCM terminal E15 and wiper/washer switch

(including wiper/washer switch contacts), refer to

Section 12C INSTRUMENTS, WIPER/WASHER &

HORN.

E15

REAR WIPER

SWITCH Displays rear wiper switch input to BCM.

With ignition on and the rear wiper switch in the on

position, screen will change from OFF to ON (this

applies to wagon only, on sedan models, the screen

will always display OFF).

Refer to 4.11 ROADSPEED DEPENDENT

VARIABLE DWELL WIPER SYSTEM in this Section.

E19

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH

Displays input to BCM.

With power windows enabled, screen displays OFF.

With driver’s window switch down button activated,

screen displays DOWN. With driver’s window switch

up button activated, screen displays UP.

If screen does not display DOWN when the down

button is activated and the window automatic down

function does not work, check for open circuit

between BCM terminal C14 and the driver’s side

power window switch.

C14 (Down)

C16 (Up)

WINDOW

AUTO DOWN

DRIVE

Screen display changes from OFF to ON when the

driver’s side power window switch automatic down

button is activated and functioning. Will also display

ON when down button is activated, but with automatic

down feature not functioning.

If the driver’s side power window operates normally

except for the automatic down feature, and all system

inputs are determined to be OK, then BCM is faulty.

POWER

WINDOW

RELAY

Displays the power window relay status as

determined by the BCM internal circuitry. The relay is

enabled by the BCM earthing circuit 173.

With the power window switch enabled (lights in

power switch illuminated), screen displays ENABLED.

With the system OFF, screen displays DISABLED.

If the screen displays ENABLED but the lights in the

power window switch do not illuminate, check for

open in wiring to BCM terminal B2.

If screen displays are not as described, refer to 4.7

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM in this Section.

CRUISE

CONTROL

INPUT SIGNAL

Displays the cruise control on/off switch input status

to the BCM.

With ignition on, each activation of the cruise on/off

switch will toggle the screen display to the next state,

ie. OFF to ON or ON to OFF.

If the screen display changes as described, but the

cruise control CRUISE lamp in the instrument cluster

does not illuminate, refer to 4.17 CRUISE CONTROL

INTERFACE in this Section.

If screen display does not change, refer to Section

12E CRUISE CONTROL.

E26

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

BONNET OPEN

SWITCH Displays bonnet switch input to BCM.

With bonnet closed (bonnet switch contacts open

circuit), screen displays OPEN. With bonnet open

(switch contacts close and the circuit is connected to

earth) screen will display CLOSED.

If circuit 260 is open circuited, the screen display will

remain OPEN.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.5

ENTRY DETERRENT in this Section.

E23

BOOT

RELAESE

SWITCH

Displays boot release switch input to BCM.

With the boot release switch (located in glove

compartment) in the rest position, screen displays

OFF. With switch held in, switch displays ON.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.5

ENTRY DETERRENT in this Section.

E22

BOOT LAMP

SWITCH Displays rear compartment (boot) lamp switch input

to the BCM.

With rear compartment lid closed (rear compartment

lamp switch contacts open), screen displays OFF.

With the rear compartment lid open (the switch

contacts close and the circuit is connected to earth),

screen will display ON.

If circuit 162 is open circuited, the screen display will

remain ON.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.5

ENTRY DETERRENT in this Section.

BOOT

SOLENOID

DRIVE

Provided the vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h,

depressing the boot release button on the remote

coded key will cause the screen display to change

from CLOSED to OPEN as the BCM internal relay is

activated.

If screen does not change or boot release does not

operate, refer to 4.5 ENTRY DETERRENT in this

Section.

RADIO STATUS Displays radio ON/OFF status input to BCM.

The radio on signal is required to enable the antenna

mast to extend.

With the radio turned off, screen displays OFF. With

radio on and the ignition in the ACC or IGN positions,

screen displays ON.

If screen does not change as described, check circuit

143 between BCM and radio.

E16

POWER

ANTENNA Displays BCM output state of BCM internal switch.

If circuit 954 is open circuited from the BCM, the

antenna mast will not extend.

With the radio off, the power antenna screen displays

OFF. With ignition in the ON or ACC position, and

radio on, screen will display AUTO UP. When

antenna mast finishes extending, screen displays

OFF.

At this position (mast extended), switch the radio off

and as the mast retracts, screen will display AUTO

DOWN.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.13

POWER ANTENNA CONTROL in this Section.

C17

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

ANTENNA

SWITCH

POSITION

Displays antenna switch input to BCM.

With switches in the rest position, screen displays

OFF. With radio on and ignition on, if up switch is

depressed, screen will display UP SWITCH, if down

switch is depressed, screen will display DOWN

SWITCH.

If screen does not change as described, refer to 4.13

POWER ANTENNA CONTROL in this Section.

E13, E14

OVERRIDE

STATUS This screen displays that status of the theft deterrent

systems override function. TECH 2 will display

SECURITY OFF when the theft deterrent system has

been overridden, ie. when the BCM has not received

any serial data from the remote coded key and the

ignition switch has been turned ON for approximately

two hours.

If the status does not change, refer to 4.4 THEFT

DETERRENT diagnosis in this Section.

SECURITY LED Displays current state of the BCM theft deterrent

system LED driver condition. If the LED is flashing, ie.

system armed, the screen will pulse between ON and

OFF.

NOTE:

TECH 2 and security LED are synchronised.

This checks that the BCM is turning on and off the

voltage supply.

If TECH 2 screen display does not change, the BCM

is faulty.

If TECH 2 screen display does change, but the LED

does not flash, check for open in wiring from BCM to

LED.

INDICATORS When the BCM activates the indicators via it’s internal

relay, the screen display alternates between ON and

OFF as the indicators flash.

This checks that the BCM is pulsing its internal relay,

thereby supplying voltage from BCM terminal B5 to

terminals B4 and B12. If screen display does not

change as described, BCM is faulty.

If screen display does change as described, but the

indicators do not flash, check for open circuit in wiring

from BCM output terminals B4 and B12 or input to

BCM terminal B5. (Refer to 4.4 THEFT DETERRENT

diagnosis in this Section).

B4, B5, B12

PASSIVE

MODE With the theft deterrent system in passive arm state,

screen displays should be ON (theft deterrent LED

flashing).

ALARM MODE With the theft deterrent system enabled (theft

deterrent LED flashing), and the system disarmed,

screen displays DISARMED. Press the LOCK button

on the remote coded key (doors closed) and centrally

lock all doors, the display should change to ARMED.

ALARM With the system armed and not triggered, the screen

displays INACTIVE. When the system is triggered,

the screen display changes to TRIGGERED.

THEFT

DETERENT

HORN

When the system is disarmed, or armed and not

triggered, the screen displays OFF. When the system

is triggered, the screen changes to ON. This action

checks if the BCM is switching ON or OFF it’s internal

driver, enabling terminals A3 and A4 to be earthed

(sounding horns).

A3, A4

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

REMOTE

BOOT SIGNAL Screen display changes to UNLOCK then OFF when

the boot release button on the remote coded key is

depressed.

If the screen displays INVALID KEY continuously

when the boot release button on the remote coded

key is depressed, and the BCM does not operate,

that particular remote coded key is not coded to the

BCM (refer to 4.20 REMOTE RECEIVER/KEY in this

Section).

NOTE:

Due to the fact that the screen changes when the

remote coded key is depressed, is confirmation that

there is an RF output from the remote coded key and

that it is recognised by the BCM either as correct or

invalid.

REMOTE

DOOR SIGNAL Screen display changes to UNLOCK then OFF when

remote coded key unlock button is depressed.

Changes to LOCK to OFF when lock button is

depressed.

If the screen displays INVALID KEY continuously

when the remote coded key is depressed, and the

BCM does not operate, that particular remote coded

key is not coded to the BCM (refer to 4.20 REMOTE

RECEIVER/KEY in this Section).

NOTE:

Due to the fact that the screen changes when the

remote coded key is depressed, is confirmation that

there is an RF output from the remote coded key and

that it is recognised by the BCM either as correct or

invalid.

REMOTE KEY

USER Depressing a button on the remote coded key

enables the BCM to read the key’s security code

information. If the remote coded key has been

programmed to the BCM, the screen displays the

remote coded key user number that has been

assigned to it during the programming process.

A BCM can have up to 31 different remote coded

keys programmed into it.

KEY PRIORITY

SIGNAL Depressing the UNLOCK button on the remote coded

key enables the BCM to read the key’s security

information. If the remote coded key has been

programmed to the BCM, the screen will display the

remote coded key’s priority number that it has been

assigned.

NOTE:

There can be only one priority one key, all other keys

are priority two.

RADIO

PRIORITY

DRIVE

Display BCM output to radio.

With ignition switch in the off position, screen displays

OFF, with ignition switch in the ACC or IGN positions,

screen will display either 1 or 2 depending on which

key was inserted into the ignition (priority key 1 or 2).

If screen displays are not as described, refer to 4.18

PRIORITY KEY SYSTEM IN THIS Section.

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

SERIAL DATA

BUS

ISOLATION

Displays serial data bus isolation internal switch

status.

During normal operations (ignition on, cranking or

engine running) the serial data bus isolation switch

will be closed and screen displays NORMAL. If

engine will not start within 0.5 seconds of being

cranked, the serial data bus isolation switch will open

(isolating auxiliary serial data bus) for a maximum

period of 5 seconds, during this time, screen display

will change to DATA CUTOFF

If screen displays are not as described, refer to 4.2

SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATION in this Section.

LOW FAN

DRIVE This checks the BCM’s ability to turn on it’s internal

driver to earth, thus enabling the engine cooling low

speed fan.

With the low speed fan not operating, screen displays

OFF. With fan operating, screen displays ON.

DTC STATUS Display will advise if any BCM DTC's are set.

Screen will display No DTC’s if there are no DTC’s, or

DTC’s Set if there are any BCM DTC’s set.

POWER STEERING

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

VEHICLE

SPEED Displays vehicle speed input to BCM via the main SDI

(circuit 1221). E2

If vehicle speed cannot be displayed, refer to 4.12

SPEED SENSITIVE POWER STEERING diagnosis

in this Section.

DESIRED PS

CURRENT

(POWER

STEERING)

With ignition ON, TECH 2 displays BCM current flow

control of power steering solenoid.

With rear of vehicle supported on safety stands, drive

vehicle and current flow indication on TECH 2 will

gradually reduce to approx. 0 mA at a vehicle speed

of 80 km/h.

If power steering current does not change, refer to

4.12 SPEED SENSITIVE POWER STEERING

diagnosis in this Section.

DTC STATUS Display will advise if any BCM DTC's are set.

Screen will display No DTC’s if there are no DTC’s, or

DTC’s Set if there are any BCM DTC’s set.

PART NUMBER

SCREEN

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION TERMINAL

AFFECTED

PART NUMBER With the theft deterrent system disarmed, TECH 2

displays the last two digits of the Holden part number

for the BCM fitted to the vehicle (ie. 85).

This information can be checked against the part

number label attached to the BCM case, refer Fig.

12J-2-1 in this Section.

F3: SNAPSHOT

In this mode, TECH 2 captures data before and after a forced manual trigger.

The purpose of the SNAPSHOT test mode is to help isolate an intermittent or transient problem by storing BCM

data parameters just before and just after a problem occurs.

F4: MISCELLANEOUS TESTS

In this test mode, Tech 2 performs various functional tests to assist in problem isolation during trouble shooting.

If a vehicle component is commanded by TECH 2 to operate and the TECH 2 screen display changes as per this

command, yet the component does not operate, check for a faulty circuit between the BCM and the component (ie.

If low speed cooling fan is commanded ON, TECH 2 screen displays LOW SPEED COOLING FAN ON yet the low

speed cooling fan is physically not ON, then check cooling fan wiring between the BCM and the low speed cooling

fan, including cooling fan, for open or short circuit).

To operate any of the miscellaneous tests, simply select the appropriate functional test from the miscellaneous test

application menu and follow the instructions as per TECH 2.

When the Miscellaneous Tests option is selected, the following options will become available.

NOTE:

Additional application menu screens will be displayed for Lamps, Wiper Tests, and Security Systems.

• Lamps: If lamps are selected, an additional application menu will be displayed offering additional functional tests

of the vehicle’s lighting system.

• Dome: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to switch on and off the interior lighting.

If the interior lighting does not operate, refer to 4.14 DOME LAMP DELA Y CONTROL diagnosis in this

Section.

• Lamp Delay Drive: In this mode with the ignition OFF and the headlamps and park lamps turned ON, TECH

2 commands the BCM to switch OFF and ON the vehicle park lamps and headlamps.

If lamps do not switch off when commanded, refer to 4.9 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS OFF (WITHOUT TWILIGHT SENTINEL) diagnosis in this Section

• Indicators: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to switch ON and OFF the turn signal indicator

lamps, including the warning lamps in the instrument cluster.

If the turn signal lamps do not operate when commanded by TECH 2, refer to 4.4 THEFT DETERRENT

diagnosis in this Section.

• Bulb Fail Lamp: In this mode and with ignition switched ON, TECH 2 commands the BCM to switch on and

off rear light failure warning light in the instrument cluster.

If the lamp in the instrument cluster will not turn ON, refer to 4.16 REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING SYSTEM

diagnosis in this Section.

• Illumination: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to brighten or dim the instrument cluster and trip

computer illumination lamps.

If the instrument cluster and trip computer illumination lamps intensity does not change when commanded by

TECH 2, refer to 4.15 INSTRUMENT DIMMING CONTROL diagnosis in this Section.

NOTE:

If the ignition is OFF and the park lamps are ON, only the instrument cluster lamps will be affected. If the

ignition is ON and the park lamps are ON, both the instrument cluster and trip computer will be affected

• Twilight Sentinel: In this mode, with the

ignition on and the headlamp switch in the

Auto position, TECH 2 commands the BCM

to turn the headlamps on and off.

If lamps do not switch off or on when commanded, refer to 4.10 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL -

AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON AND OFF (WITH TWILIGHT SENTINEL) diagnosis in this Section.

• Low Fan: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to switch ON and then OFF, (will switch OFF automatically

after a short period provided the PCM is not commanding the low fan on) the engine cooling low speed fan relay.

If the engine cooling low speed fans do not operate in this mode, refer to 4.8 ENGINE COOLING LOW SPEED

FAN CONTROL diagnosis in this Section.

• Data Bus Isolator: In this mode, the BCM data bus isolator switch can be opened or closed.

To check if the data bus isolator is operating, while commanding the data bus isolator open with TECH 2, start

engine and monitor the trip computers “instant fuel consumption” display while varying the engine speed. When

the data bus isolator switch is opened, the trip computers instant fuel consumption display will not update.

• If the data bus isolator will not change state, refer to 4.2 SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATION diagnosis, in this

Section.

NOTE:

The Data Bus Isolator will only be held open for 5 seconds.

• Central Locking: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to operate all door lock actuators.

If door locks do not operate, refer to 4.3 CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING diagnosis in this Section.

• Wiper Tests: If Wipers are selected, an additional application menu will be displayed offering extra functional

tests of the vehicles wiper system.

• Front Wipers: In this mode, the front windshield wipers can be driven ON and OFF.

• Rear Wipers: In this mode, the rear screen wipers can be driven ON and OFF.

If the wipers to not operate when commanded by TECH 2, refer to 4.11 ROADSPEED DEPENDENT

VARIABLE DWELL WIPER SYSTEM in this Section.

• Window Down: In this mode, the driver’s window can be driven down.

NOTE:

Before entering and conducting this test, ensure that driver's side power window is fully up.

If the power window auto down function does not operate when commanded by TECH 2, refer to 4.7 POWER

WINDOW SYSTEM diagnosis in this Section.

• Antenna: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to raise or lower the antenna.

If the antenna mast does not operate, refer to 4.13 POWER ANTENNA CONTROL diagnosis in this Section.

• Horn: In this mode, the horn can be switched ON.

If the vehicles horns do not sound when commanded by TECH 2, refer to 4.5 ENTRY DETERRENT diagnosis in

this Section.

• Power Steering: In this test, TECH 2 commands the BCM to vary the current flow through the power steering

solenoid, thereby varying the amount of power steering assist.

For this test, start the engine and allow to idle.

With engine idling, rock steering wheel from side to side while pressing the INCREASE or DECREASE soft keys

(alternatively, press and hold the left arrow key and then press and hold the right arrow key) on TECH 2 to

command changes in power steering assistance.

As changes are made to the commanded current flow, a noticeable difference in the effort to rock the steering

wheel should be felt.

If during test, the effort required to rock the steering wheel from side to side does not change, and there are no

faults detected by the BCM, (no BCM DTC’s set), carry out steering gear checks as per Section 9B, SPEED

SENSITIVE POWER STEERING.

• Power Window Relay: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to turn off the power window relay.

If the power relay is disabled, the power window will not function. If power windows still function while disabled, refer

to 4.7 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM diagnosis in this Section.

• Security System: If the security system mode is selected, an additional application menu will be displayed

offering additional functional tests of the vehicles security system.

• Security LED: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to turn the theft deterrent alert indicator LED ON

and OFF.

If the theft deterrent LED does not operate in this mode, refer to 4.4 THEFT DETERRENT diagnosis in this

Section.

• Boot Release: In this mode, TECH 2 commands the BCM to activate the sedan rear compartment lock

actuator.

If the boot release does not work in this mode, refer to 4.6 BOOT RELEASE diagnosis in this Section.

• Theft Horn: In this mode, the theft deterrent horns can be switched ON.

If the vehicles theft deterrent horns do not sound when commanded by TECH 2, refer to 4.5 ENTRY

DETERRENT diagnosis in this Section.

• Key Priority: In this mode, the priority key status can be switched from priority one to priority two or priority

two to priority one.

If the priority mode does not change status when commanded by TECH 2, refer to 4.18 PRIORITY KEY

SYSTEM diagnosis in this Section.

F5: PROGRAM

In this test mode, TECH 2 allows the programming of various features by turning the feature OFF or ON, or

adjusting settings to suit individual owner requests.

To operate any of the programming features, simply select the appropriate function to be changed from the

Program Application Menu and follow the instructions as per TECH 2.

When the Program option is selected, the following choices will become available.

• Rear Wiper Control: In this mode, the rear wiper intermittent control can be disabled. By disabling this feature, it

will change the rear wiper continuously sweeping the tailgate screen when the rear intermittent wiper is activated

and reverse gear is selected to continuously sweeping the tailgate screen when the front wiper is activated and

reverse gear is selected.

• Antenna Height Memory: In this mode, the antenna height memory can be switched off, resulting in the

antenna mask fully extending each time the radio is switched on.

• Two Stage Unlocking: In this mode, the two stage door unlock feature (one press of remote coded key unlock

button will unlock the driver’s door only, a second press will open all doors) can be disabled, thus enabling single

stage unlock (one press of remote coded key unlock button will unlock all doors).

• Set Key to Priority: In this mode, the priority key in the ignition sw itch can be set to become priority one.

• Twilight Sentinel: In this mode, the sensitivity of the twilight sentinel can be adjusted from 0 to 7. All vehicles

will have the twilight sentinel set to a default value of 4. If the driver requests the lights to come on latter (when it

is darker), the sensitivity of the twilight sentinel should be adjusted down (towards 0). If the driver requests the

lights to come on earlier (when it is lighter), the sensitivity of the twilight sentinel should be adjusted up (towards

7).

F6: SECURITY

In this test mode, Tech 2 provides the user with the capability of: linking the PCM to the BCM, reading security

information (ie. radio pin numbers), and programming security features (ie. keys).

NOTE:

A precondition to all security features is: the theft deterrent system must be disarmed and the ignition must be

switched ON with a programmed remote coded key.

When the Security option is selected, the following choices will become available.

• BCM Link to PCM: If the BCM is replaced, the new BCM must be linked to the PCM otherwise, the vehicle will

not crank. Likewise, if the PCM is replaced, the new PCM must be security linked to the BCM.

By selecting this mode, after the new BCM or PCM has been installed, TECH 2 will security link these components.

Once BCM link to PCM is selected, simply following the instructions of TECH 2.

• Security Information: If this mode is selected, the following vehicle security information is displayed.

• Radio PIN

• Mechanical Key Number

• Glove Box Key

• Program: Programming features are only available to Authorised Holden Dealers. Consult separate literature for

further details.

4. DIAGNOSIS

4.1 PREREQUISITES TO DIAGNOSIS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

PRELIMINARY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The prerequisites before proceeding with system checks are:

• Ensure no moisture is present in the wiring harness connections in either A-pillar.

• Ensure that sound earth connections are available for all functioning components, particularly at the body earth

connection (fender panel inner stud, adjacent to the battery).

• Ensure the battery is in good condition and adequately charged (above 11.5 volts) before carrying out any

electrical checks.

SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Disconnect the battery when carrying out work which involves the risk of an electrical short circuit.

Do not touch mechanical components during function checks, to avoid the risk of a hand being caught in the

mechanism.

CHECKING EQUIPMENT

TECH 2 scan tool.

A digital multimeter, with a minimum 10 Megohm impedance MUST be used when undertaking any electrical

checks on these systems.

Exercise care when taking readings from wiring harness connectors. It is preferred that the back probing method

with individual connectors is employed wherever possible, to avoid terminal damage and subsequent connection

failure.

When carrying out wiring checks as directed to by the diagnostic charts, rather than probe terminals and connectors

with incorrect sized multimeter connections, use the adaptors contained in connector test adaptor kit KM-609. This

will prevent any possibility of spreading or damaging wiring harness terminals.

IMPORTANT:

ENSURE THAT THE IGNITION IS TURNED OFF AND THE BATTERY EARTH LEAD IS DISCONNECTED

BEFORE ANY TEST THAT REQUIRES DISCONNECTION OR RECONNECTION OF ANY OF THE BCM

CONNECTORS.

• When checking the complete system, the exact order of the test steps should be observed.

• If the required nominal value is not achieved in any stage, then the problem must be rectified before proceeding

further.

• Unless the multimeter being used has an auto ranging function, check that the correct range, as specified, is

selected before the test is carried out.

• It will be necessary to lower the BCM down to gain access to BCM wiring harness connectors, refer to

2.2 HIGH SERIES BCM in this Section.

• Testing of the various systems will involve gaining access to specific wiring harness connectors. For the

location of these connectors, refer to Section 12N FUSES AND WIRING HARNESSES.

Techline

KEY READER CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS

INTERMITTENT OPERATION

Preliminary Checks

• Check for loose key shaft.

• Check for correct screws.

• Correct length of remote key shaft. (Check shaft against a known good key).

• Remove the key shaft, clean the earth contact, key shaft and reinstall the key shaft. If screws won’t retain or if

the screw threads are deformed, then replace the screws.

STEP ACTION YES NO

1. • Is the case cracked along the weld line, or are there

visible gaps (at the sides only)? Refer to Figure

12J-2-124A. Replace Key. Go to step 2.

2. • Are any of the buttons collapsed , depressed or

damaged? Replace Key. Go to step 3.

3. • With the Theft Deterrent LED flashing, insert the remote

key into the ignition switch and slowly turn to the ‘ON’

position.

• Does the Theft Deterrent LED stop flashing?

Go to step 4. Go to step 6.

4. • With the Theft Deterrent LED off, turn the remote key to

the ‘START’ position.

• Does the vehicle start? Go to step 5

Refer to 4.4

Theft Deterrent

diagnosis in

this Section.

5 • Does the customer complain that occasionally the

Traction Control Light remains ‘ON’ or Theft Deterrent

LED continues to flash at a quicker rate after starting?

Go to step 7. Go to step 6.

6. • Connect a multimeter between a known good earth and

one of the reader slip rings.

• Apply a thick tape over the remote key contact pin and

insert into the ignition switch.

• Is there on the slip ring 4 - 6V AC constantly when the

remote key is turned to the ‘ON’ position?

• At end of test, remove tape from the remote key.

Go to step 7. Go to step 8.

7. • Check integrity of ignition barrel earth by-:

Visually inspecting earth strap on ignition lock

housing.

Checking tightness of earth strap.

Checking for continuity to known good earth.

• Is ignition barrel earth OK?

Vehicle built

prior to

15/8/01,

Go to Step 10.

Vehicle built

after 15/8/01

Go to Step 11.

Repair or

replace faulty

components.

Recheck circuit

to verify repair.

8. • With a multimeter check for continuity between BCM and

remote key reader.

• Is there continuity? Go to step 9.

Repair open

circuit.

Recheck circuit

to verify repair.

9. • Disconnect appropriate BCM connector (Refer to Wiring

Diagrams)

• With the ignition switch in the ‘OFF’ position check for a

short to B+/Earth on the slip ring.

• Is there a short?

Repair short

circuit.

Recheck

circuit to verify

repair.

Call Australian

Arrow on

03 9785 0792

10. • Align Key reader

- Remove key reader and align the locating rib on the

Reader with the ignition barrel.

• Does the vehicle start?

Verify repair.

Return vehicle

to customer

and monitor.

Go to step 11.

STEP ACTION YES NO

11. • Check for a slip ring contact as per following procedure -:

- Remove starter relay from the engine bay to prevent

the vehicle from cranking.

- Disconnect Remote key reader connector by access

from under steering column cover.

- Ensure the Theft Deterrent LED is flashing, and

slowly turn key and hold in crank position.

- While holding in crank position, reconnect the reader

connector.

- Does the Theft Deterrent LED switch off (has key

been read)?

- Remove ignition key, rotate it 180 degrees, insert into

the ignition switch and check contact with the

second slip ring with the same method.

• Did the or Theft Deterrent LED stop flashing in both first

and second slip ring tests?

Call Australian

Arrow on

03 9785 0792 Go to step 12.

12. • Check for worn or relaxed key reader contacts as per

following procedure -:

- With or Theft Deterrent LED flashing, turn key to

Accessories position.

- Apply outward pre-load to key, by pulling on key

gently away from reader.

- While monitoring or Theft Deterrent LED, quickly turn

key from Accessory to crank position.

- Visually inspect for the key contact pin making

contact with the slip ring.,

- Remove ignition key, rotate it 180 degrees, insert into

the ignition switch and check contact with the second

slip ring with the same method.

• Did the Theft Deterrent LED stop flashing?

Vehicle built

prior to May

98, Replace

Remote Key.

Vehicle built

post May 98,

Call Australian

Arrow on

03 9785 0792

Replace with

full circle slip

ring assembly.

REMOTE OPERA TION

Diagnostic Aids:

Prior to fur ther diagnosis, technicians should be aware of the following system functions:

• There is a 2 second delay on the remote boot release

• The central locking system will time-out as a result of multiple activation of the lock or unlock remote

buttons.

• Loss of rolling code synchronisation can be rectified by cycling the key in ignition.

• Metal objects such as other keys on the key ring or key tags can effect range if folded over the remote key

head.

• If the reported problem is specific to one area, radio or TV towers can effect key range and performance.

• Damaged key casing may cause moisture ingress resulting in premature key failure.

STEP ACTION YES NO

1. • Is the case cracked along the weld line, or are there

visible gaps (at the sides only)? Refer to Figure

12J-2-124A. Replace Key. Go to step 2.

2. • Are any of the buttons collapsed , depressed or

damaged? Replace Key. Go to step 3.

3. • With all doors closed and unlocked, insert the remote into

the driver’s door lock barrel and turn anti-clockwise.

• Do all doors lock? Go to step 5. Go to step 4.

STEP ACTION YES NO

4. • Does the Dome lamp remain on with the ignition in the

‘ON’ position and all the doors closed? Inspect door

jamb switches

or circuit for

short to earth.

Refer to 4.3

Central Door

Locking

diagnosis in this

Section.

5. • With all doors closed and unlocked, operate the

DOOR/LOCK button on the remote key within 4 metres of

the driver’s side ‘B’ pillar.

• Do all doors lock?

Go to step 6. Go to step 7.

6. • Vehicles with remote boot operation,

- Operate the BOOT button on the remote key for at

least 2 seconds within 2 metres of the rear of the

vehicle.

• Does the boot solenoid activate?

Refer diagnostic

aids above then

Go to step 10. Go to step 8

7. • Does the remote key operate intermittently w h ile

tapping it? Replace Key. Go to step 8.

8. • Connect TECH 2 to the DLC.

• Proceed to the BCM Data List mode and select REMOTE

DOOR and REMOTE BOOT signals.

• Operate the UNLOCK/LOCK/BOOT button on the remote

key.

• Does the Screen Display change to show either

‘UNLOCK’ or ‘LOCK’ or ‘OPEN’?

For Door

unlocking

problems, call

Australian

Arrow on

03 9785 0792.

For boot release

problems refer

to 4.6 Boot

Release

diagnosis in this

Section.

Go to Step 9.

9. • Connect TECH 2 to the DLC of another fully functional

VT/WH vehicle.

• Proceed to the BCM Data List mode and select REMOTE

DOOR and REMOTE BOOT signals.

• Operate the UNLOCK/LOCK/BOOT button on the remote

key.

• Does the Screen Display change to show ‘INVALID

KEY’?

Go to Step 10. Replace Remote

Key .

10. • Test receiver/sunsensor

- Confirm normal 4 metre remote range is achievable

with passenger compartment cool.

- Use a 150 Watt lamp applied to the remote receiver

for 5 minutes maximum.

Recheck remote range – is it less than 4 metres from the

drivers side door when hot but more than 4 metres range

when cold?

Replace

receiver or

sunsensor

Call Australian

Arrow Customer

Service on

03 9785 0792

Figure 12J-2-124A

4.2 SERIAL DATA COMMUNICATION

Figure 12J-2-125

GENERAL INFORMATION

The VT Series Model uses a Bus Master communication system, where the BCM is the Bus Master.

The BCM periodically polls (surveys) each device on the bus and requests status data.

The devices connected to the bus are:

• Body Control Module (BCM)

• Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

• Instrument cluster (INS)

• Antilock Brake System / Electronic Traction Control (ABS/ETC)

• Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

• Electronic Climate Control (ECC)

• External diagnostic scan tool (TECH 2)

The data provided by each device may be utilised by any device connected to the bus.

Each device has a unique response Message Identifier Word (MIW) for ease of identification.

The bus master (BCM) polls each control module with a serial data message which includes the BCM’s MIW. The

other control modules respond by putting a serial data message back onto the bus. The other control modules

message includes its own MIW and data, of which is retrieved and utilised by any device on the bus requiring it.

Excluding the PCM, the BCM polls each device for a status update once every 300 milliseconds. The BCM polls the

PCM twice every 300 milliseconds.

When the ignition is switched from OFF to ON, the BCM will communicate with the PCM, via the main serial data

line (circuit 1221), for antitheft purposes and TECH 2 will be able to communicate with any module via the ALDL

mode. If the BCM does not receive an OK TO START message from the PCM within 0.5 seconds of the ignition

being switched on, the auxiliary serial data line (circuit 1220) is isolated via switching within the BCM.

The isolation of the auxiliary serial data line during this period eliminates any possibility of a device failure other than

the PCM or BCM causing a problem on the bus and inhibiting antitheft communications. This period (know as short

loop time) continues until the PCM responds with an acknowledgment or a maximum of 5 seconds, after which the

BCM will switch to the standard polling sequence.

Following successful antitheft communications, the BCM begins sequential polling of devices on the bus and normal

system operation is established.

When the ignition is switched OFF, the BCM continues to poll, allowing for TECH 2 communications and external

control of the bus prior to the ignition being switched ON.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Ensures TECH 2 is functioning correctly.

2. Checks if TECH 2 can communicate with the BCM.

3. Checks if TECH 2 can communicate with the PCM.

4. Checks if TECH 2 can communicate with all the devices (SRS, ABS/ETC, ECC, INS) on the auxiliary serial data

line.

5. Determines if there is a fault in the serial data circuit (1221) between the BCM and PCM by starting the engine. If

serial data was lost while the engine was running, the engine will restart but there will be a one second delay.

6. Checks continuity of circuit 1221 between the BCM and the DLC.

7. Checks if main serial data line crash is cause by control module interference connected to the auxiliary serial

data line, or a short battery + or earth on the auxiliary data line.

8. Checks for correct voltage on the serial data line.

9. Checks if the PCM is causing interface on the serial data line.

10. Checks integrity of circuit 1221 between the BCM and PCM, and if there is a problem with the PCM.

11. Checks to establish whether lost communication between modules on the auxiliary serial data line and TECH 2

is due to an open in circuit 1221 or the module itself.

12. Checks to establish whether loss of communication on the auxiliary serial data line is due to an open in circuit

1221 or the BCM.

Figure 12J-2-126

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Push power button on

TECH 2.

• Does TECH 2 power

up (screen will

illuminate display

TECH 2)?

Go to Step 2. Go to TECH 2

diagnosis, refer

to Section 0C

TECH 2 .

2. • With TECH 2 still

connected and ignition

ON, select

DIAGNOSTICS /

BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE.

• Does TECH 2 display

BCM system

identification

information (BCM level

and type)?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 5.

3. • With TECH 2 still

connected, ignition

ON, exit BODY and

select DIAGN O STICS

/ ENGINE / ENGINE

TYPE (ie V6).

• Does TECH 2 display

PCM system

identification

information (ie. prom

identification)?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 12.

4. • With TECH 2 still

connected, ignition

ON, exit ENGINE

DIAGNOSTICS and

select BODY / DTC

CHECK / DTC

CHECK.

• Can TECH 2

communicate with all

control modules fitted

to the vehicle (if NO

DATA is displayed next

to a control module,

then there is no

communication

between TECH 2 and

that control module)?

System OK. Go to Step 13.

5. • Will the engine crank

and start immediately

the key is turned from

off to start (no delay)?

Go to Step 6. Go to Step 8.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. • Turn Ignition OFF

• Back probe DLC

connector YB128,

terminal 9, circuit 1221

(Red/Black wire) and

BCM connector

YB175, terminal E2,

circuit 1221 (Red/Black

wire) with an

Ohmmeter.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 7. Check and

repair open in

circuit 1221

between DLC

and BCM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

7. • Disconnect control

modules on auxiliary

serial data line

(ABS/ETC, ECC, SRS,

INS) one at a time

checking each time if

TECH 2 can

communicate with the

BCM (refer to Step 2).

• Does communication

between the BCM and

TECH 2 resume after

disconnecting any of

the control modules?

Go to suspect

control module

diagnosis in the

relevant Section.

Check and

repair short to

B+ or earth in

circuit 1220.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe DLC

connector YB128,

terminal 9, circuit 1221

(Red/Black wire) with a

volt meter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Fluctuates

between

3 and 5

volts

Go to Step 9. Go to Step 10.

9. • Disconnect PCM.

• Can TECH 2

communicate with the

BCM (refer to Step 2)?

Go to PCM

diagnostics in

Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT

- V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT

- V8 ENGINE.

Go to theft

deterrent

diagnosis, refer

4.4 THEFT

DETERRENT in

this Section.

10. • Disconnect PCM.

• Can TECH 2

communicate with the

BCM (refer to Step 2)?

Go to PCM

diagnostics in

Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT

- V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT

- V8 ENGINE.

Go to Step 11.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

11. • Disconnect BCM and

TECH 2.

• Check integrity (ie.

Short to B+, short to

earth, and continuity)

of circuit 1221

(Red/Black wire)

between BCM and

DLC, and PCM and

DLC.

• Is circuit 1221 OK ?

Go to theft

deterrent

diagnosis, refer

4.4 THEFT

DETERRENT in

this Section.

Repair circuit

1221 as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

12. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E2, circuit

1221 (Red/Black wire)

and PCM connector

YB188, terminal A3,

circuit 1221 (Red/Black

wire) with an

Ohmmeter.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to PCM

diagnostics in

Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V8 ENGINE.

Check and repair

open in circuit

1221 between

PCM and BCM.

13. • In Step 4, was TECH 2

able to communicate

with at least one of the

control modules on the

auxiliary serial data

line (ABS/ETC, INS,

ECC, SRS)?

• NOTE:

• TECH 2 will display

NO DATA next to a

control module that it

can not communicate

with in the DTC

CHECK mode.

Go to Step 14. Go to Step 15.

14. • Check continuity

between BCM and

suspect control module

in circuit 1220

(Green/White wire).

• Does continuity exist?

Go to suspect

control module

diagnosis in the

relevant Section.

Repair open in

circuit 1220

between suspect

control module

and the BCM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

15. • Check continuity

between BCM and all

control modules on the

auxiliary serial data

line.

• Does continuity exist?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair open in

circuit 1220.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.3 CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING

Figure 12J-1-127

GENERAL INFORMATION

The central door locking system provides for locking and unlocking of all doors and tailgate (station wagon models)

as well as enhanced locking or deadlock (doors only).

The system incorporates the following functions:

1. Door and tailgate locking activated via:

Driver's door lock actuator (mechanically linked to door interior snib and door latch).

Left-hand front passenger’s door lock actuator (mechanically linked to interior snib button).

Driver’s door lock microswitches, which are also mechanically linked to the door latch, and therefore linked to the

actuators. VT Series Models require microswitch activation to force lock (and unlock) without moving the

actuator.

Pressing the lock button on remote coded key (provided the driver’s door is closed).

2. Door and tailgate unlocking via:

All door lock actuators (mechanically linked to door interior snib).

Pressing the unlock button on remote coded key.

The driver’s door lock cylinder can also be moved independently of the actuator, allowing unlocking of the driver’s

door latch in the case where the actuator is stuck down, ie. deadlock when the battery is discharged.

3. Single and Two Stage Unlocking

The BCM is capable of operating in either of two unlock modes, either two or single stage unlock. The BCM, as

fitted to the vehicle, is programmed to operate the central door locking system in the two stage unlock mode.

Two Stage Unlock

In two stage unlock mode, when the remote coded key unlock button is depressed for 0.25 seconds, the BCM, on

receiving the unlock request from the remote coded key via the remote receiver, will unlock the driver’s door only. If

the remote coded key unlock button is depressed again for 0.25 seconds the BCM, on receiving the second unlock

request from the remote coded key, will unlock all passenger doors.

Or alternatively, if the remote coded key is depressed continuously for 0.5 seconds, the BCM, on receiving the

unlock request from the remote coded key, will unlock all doors; first the driver’s door, then all passenger doors.

Single Stage Unlock

In single stage unlock mode, when the remote coded key unlock button is depressed for 0.25 seconds or longer,

the BCM on receiving the unlock request from the remote coded key, will unlock all doors simultaneously.

With TECH 2, the BCM can be programmed to operate in either two stage or single stage unlock (depending on the

vehicle’s owner or operator requirements).

If a short circuit exists on either the lock or unlock signal inputs, the opposing input is still able to perform its

function. This enables the doors to be unlocked when a short circuit exists on the lock input or vice-versa.

To protect the motors used in the door and tailgate lock actuators, in the event of multiple activation's within a

defined time period, the system will time-out and protect the motors from damage. After a fixed time delay, the

system will re-activate as normal.

The deadlock feature provides for mechanical jamming of the door lock actuators. This is achieved electrically via

the driver's door lock microswitch.

NOTE:

Deadlock is inhibited whilst the ignition is on.

SYSTEM CHECK

The operation of the Central Door Locking System is independent of the ignition being switched ON or OFF.

'Deadlock' refers to the electrical means that can be activated to ensure vehicle security by inhibiting door lock

operation.

Even though the electronic theft deterrent system, via the remote coded key, can activate the lock on each door, it

does not engage the deadlocking of the doors.

Central Locking and Unlocking

Operation of this system can be effected as follows;

1. Driver’s door, outside key and inside locking (snib) button (locking and unlocking).

2. Left-hand front passenger door inside locking (snib) button (locking and unlocking)

3. Rear passenger doors inside locking (snib) button (only unlocking is possible).

Deadlock

The deadlocking feature applies to all four doors, but not to the luggage compartment lid or tailgate.

After the deadlocking feature device has been engaged, unlocking is possible at the driver’s door from outside, by

inserting the key into the driver’s door lock cylinder and turning the key to the unlock position or by activating the

unlock button on the remote key to unlock the deadlocks on all doors. Either method only unlocks the driver’s door

when the two stage unlocking is enabled.

To ensure access to the vehicle if the electrical system should fail (discharged battery), after the system has been

engaged, the driver’s door lock cylinder can be moved independently of the actuator and therefore allowing

unlocking of the driver’s door latch.

The rear compartment lid or tailgate can be locked/unlocked when the mechanical deadlocking feature is actuated,

while leaving the doors secured. However, if the theft deterrent system has been activated, the alarm will sound

when the rear compartment lid is raised (sedans only).

NOTE:

Deadlocking is not possible with the ignition in the ON position.

Overheating Prevention

In the event of multiple activation's within a defined time period, the central door locking system will be deactivated

and remain inoperative for a defined time period to prevent the door actuators from overheating. After a fixed time

delay, the system will re-activate and operate as normal.

Diagnostics

NOTE:

When investigating a complaint of a central door system locking problem or malfunction, always start the diagnosis

with the functional check in this Section.

The functional check is a quick check of the central door locking system that will refer the reader to the appropriate

diagnostic chart in this Section.

When conducting the central door locking diagnostic tests, some procedures require locking and unlocking of the

door lock mechanism. Therefore, as an aid in testing, leave the appropriate door open and use a screw driver to

rotate the door lock mechanism to the locked position.

Figure 12J-2-128

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • All doors locked.

• Operate unlock button

remote coded key

within 4 metres of

driver’s side B pillar.

• Does driver’s door

unlock (2 stage

unlocking) or all doors

(single stage

unlocking)?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 2.

2. • All doors locked.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Do all doors unlock?

Go to remote

receiver

diagnosis, refer

4.20 REMOTE

RECEIVER/KEY

in this Section.

Go to Part A

UNLOCKING

DOORS,

DRIVER’S DOOR

LOCK

MICROSWITCH.

3. • All doors unlocked.

• All doors closed.

• Operate lock button on

remote coded key

within 4 metres of

driver’s side B pillar.

• Do all doors lock?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 4.

4. • All doors unlocked.

• All doors closed.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door lock microswitch

(turn key to lock

position).

• Do all doors lock?

Go to remote

receiver

diagnosis, refer

4.20 REMOTE

RECEIVER/KEY

in this Section.

Go to Part B

LOCK DOORS,

DRIVER’S DOOR

LOCK

MICROSWITCH.

5. • All doors locked.

• All doors closed.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Do all doors unlock?

Go to Step 6. Go to Part A

UNLOCKING

DOORS,

DRIVER’S DOOR

LOCK

MICROSWITCH.

6. • All doors closed.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door lock microswitch

(turn key to lock

position).

• Do all doors lock?

Go to Step 7. Go to Part B

LOCK DOORS,

DRIVER’S DOOR

LOCK

MICROSWITCH

7. • All doors locked (not

deadlocked).

• Activate driver’s door

snib (unlock).

• Do all doors unlock?

Go to Step 8. Go to Part C

UNLOCK

DOORS,

DRIVER’S DOOR

ACTUATOR

(SNIB).

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

8. • All doors closed.

• Activate driver’s door

snib (lock).

• Do all doors lock?

Go to Step 9. Go to Part D

LOCK DOORS,

DRIVER’S DOOR

ACTUATOR

(SNIB)

9. • All doors locked (not

deadlocked).

• Activate each

passenger’s door snib

(unlock).

• Do all doors unlock

(each snib)?

Go to Step 10. Go to Part E

UNLOCK

DOORS,

PASSENGER’S

DOOR

ACTUATOR

(SNIB).

10. • All doors closed.

• Activate left hand front

passenger’s door snib

(lock).

• Do all doors lock?

Go to Step 11

(wagon)

Go to Step 13

(sedan).

Go to Part F

LOCK DOORS,

PASSENGER’S

LHF DOOR

ACTUATOR

(SNIB).

11. • Tailgate locked.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Does tailgate unlock?

Go to Step 12. Go to Part G

UNLOCK

TAILGATE.

12. • Tailgate unlocked.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door lock microswitch

(turn key to lock

position).

• Does tailgate lock?

Go to Step 13. Replace tailgate

lock actuator,

refer to

1A4 REAR

COMPARTMENT

LID AND

TAILGATE.

13. • Doors unlocked.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and deadlock

doors (turn key to lock

twice sequentially).

• Are all doors

deadlocked?

Go to Step 14. Go to Part H

DEADLOCKING

DOORS.

14. • Doors deadlocked.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Do all doors unlock?

System OK. Go to Part I

UNLOCKING

DOORS FROM

DEADLOCK.

PART A - UNLOCKING DOORS, DRIVER’S DOOR LOCK MICROSWITCH

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to unlock all doors (establish whether problem is with the output or the input of the BCM

2. Uses TECH 2 to check for false DRIVERS UNLOCK signal.

3. Checks if false DRIVERS UNLOCK signal initiated by BCM.

5. Checks for battery voltage at input to BCM.

6. Checks for earth to door actuators at output of BCM.

7. Checks circuit 394.

8. Checks for driver’s door unlock drive when commanded by TECH 2.

9. Checks for passenger doors unlock drive when commanded by TECH 2.

10. Checks circuits 293 and 294 / actuators.

11. Checks for high current earth at BCM.

12. Uses TECH 2 to check for DRIVERS UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal at microprocessor of BCM.

13. Checks DRIVER’S UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal at input to BCM - circuit 193.

14. Checks circuit 156 / microswitch.

15. Checks if false DRIVER’S UNLOCK signal initiated by driver’s door actuator.

16. Checks if false DRIVER’S UNLOCK signal initiated by driver’s door lock microswitch / short to earth, circuit

193.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Doors locked.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / CENTRAL

LOCK and conduct

test as instructed by

TECH 2.

• Do all doors unlock?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4.

2. • Doors locked.

• With TECH 2 still

connected, exit

MISCELLANEOUS

TEST and select

DATA DISPLAY.

• •Scroll to

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 12.

3. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Replace BCM Go to Step 15.

4. • While conducting test

in Step 1, did at least

one passenger door

unlock?

Go to Step 7. Go to Step 5.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B11, circuit

440 (Orange/Violet

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 6. Check and repair

circuit 440

(including fuse

F20). Recheck

and verify repair.

6. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C12, circuit

394 (Violet/White wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 7. Go to Step 12.

7. • Back probe all door

actuator connectors

YB57/YB90, terminal

1, circuit 394

(Violet/White wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 8. Repair open in

circuit 394.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • Doors locked.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C3, circuit 293

(Blue /Black wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / CENTRAL

LOCK.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2

and unlock doors.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to Step 9. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • Door locked.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C26, circuit

294 (Black/Red wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Repeat TECH 2

CENTRAL LOCK test

and unlock doors.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to Step 10. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

10. • Back probe all door

actuator connectors

YB57/YB90, terminal

2, circuit 293

(Blue/Black wire) and

circuit 294 (Black/Red

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Repeat TECH 2

CENTRAL LOCK test

and unlock doors.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Repair open in

circuit 293 or 294.

Recheck and

verify repair.

11. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B10, circuit

151 (Black/Green wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair open in

circuit 151.

Recheck and

verify repair.

12. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY and

scroll to DRIVER’S

UNLOCK SWITCH

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 13.

13. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C20, circuit

193 (LGreen/Yellow

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 14.

14.

• Back probe driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29, circuit

156 (Black/Blue wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace driver’s

door exterior

handle assembly,

refer Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Repair open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

15.

• With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed,

reconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Disconnect driver’s

door actuator

connector YB57.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Go to Step 17 Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES

16.

• With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed,

disconnect driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29.

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Check and repair

short in

circuit 193

(LGreen/

Yellow wire).

Replace driver’s

door exterior

handle assembly,

refer Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

PART B - LOCK DOORS, DRIVER’S DOOR LOCK MICROSWITCH

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to lock all doors (establish whether problem is with the output or the input of the BCM.

2. Uses TECH 2 to check for false DRIVER’S LOCK signal.

3. Checks if false DRIVER’S LOCK signal initiated by BCM.

4. Uses TECH 2 to check for DRIVER’S DOOR CLOSED signal at microprocessor of BCM.

5. Checks for earth to driver’s door actuators at output of BCM.

6. Checks for earth to passenger’s door actuators at output of BCM.

7. Checks for door lock drive when commanded by TECH 2.

8. Checks circuit 295 / actuators.

10. Uses TECH 2 to check for DRIVER’S LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal at microprocessor of BCM.

11. Checks DRIVER’S LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal at input to BCM.

12. Checks circuit 197.

13. Checks circuit 156 / microswitch.

14. Checks if false DRIVER’S LOCK signal initiated by driver’s door lock microswitch / short to earth, circuit 197.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • All doors closed.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / CENTRAL

LOCK and conduct

test as instructed by

TECH 2.

• Do all doors lock?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4.

2. • Doors unlocked.

• With TECH 2 still

connected, exit

MISCELLANEOUS

TEST and select

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DRIVER’S

LOCK SWITCH.

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 10.

3. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVERS LOCK

SWITCH displayed.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 14.

4. • All doors closed.

• With TECH 2 still

connected, exit

MISCELLANEOUS

TEST and select

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DRIVERS

DOOR.

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S DOOR

CLOSED?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 9.

5. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C3, circuit 293

(Blue /Black wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 6. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

6. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C26, circuit

294 (Black/Red wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 7. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

7. • All doors closed.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / CENTRAL

LOCK.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C13, circuit

295 (Black/Yellow

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Conduct door lock test

as instructed by TECH

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to Step 8. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / CENTRAL

LOCKING selected,

back probe all door

actuator connectors

YB90/YB57, terminal

6, circuit 295

(Black/Yellow wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Conduct door lock

actuator test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Check and repair

open in circuit 295

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • With TECH 2 still

connected and DATA

DISPAY selected,

scroll to DRIVERS

DOOR display.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS DOOR

CLOSED?

Check and repair

faulty door jamb

switch, or short to

ground in

circuit 126

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • With TECH 2 still

connected and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to DRIVER’S

LOCK SWITCH.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door lock microswitch

(turn key to lock

position).

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

11. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C22, circuit

197 (Brown/White

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door lock microswitch

(turn key to lock

position).

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 12.

12. • Back probe driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29, circuit

197 (Brown/White

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door lock microswitch

(turn key to lock

position)

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Repair open in

circuit 197.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 13.

13. • Back probe driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29, circuit

156 (Black/Blue wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace driver’s

door exterior

handle assembly,

refer Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Repair open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

14. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVERS LOCK

SWITCH displayed,

reconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Disconnect Driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Repair short to

earth in circuit

197. Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace driver’s

door exterior

handle assembly,

refer to Section

1A5 FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

PART C - UNLOCK DOORS, DRIVER’S DOOR ACTUATOR (SNIB)

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Checks driver’s door snib unlock signal (earth) at driver’s door actuator when operating driver’s door snib

UNLOCK.

2. Checks circuit 156 / driver’s door actuator.

UNLOCK DOORS, DRIVER’S DOOR ACTUATOR (SNIB)

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • All doors locked.

• Back probe driver’s

door actuator

connector YB57,

terminal 3, circuit 193

(L Green/Yellow wire)

with an Ohmmeter to a

sound earth.

• Unlock doors using

driver’s snib button.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and repair

open in circuit 193

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 2.

2. • Back probe driver’s

door actuator

connector YB57,

terminal 5, circuit 156

(Black/Blu e wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Check and repair

open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

PART D - LOCK DOORS, DRIVER’S DOOR ACTUATOR (SNIB)

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check for false ACTUATOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal.

2. Checks if false ACTUATOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal initiated by BCM.

3. Uses TECH 2 to check for ACTUATOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal at microprocessor of BCM.

4. Checks for ACTUATOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal at input to BCM.

5. Checks circuit 195 / driver’s door actuator.

6. Checks if false ACTUATOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal initiated by driver’s door actuator.

7. Checks if false ACTUATOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK signal initiated by LHF passenger door / short to earth in

circuit 195.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • All doors locked.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY and

scroll to ACTUATOR

LOCK SWITCH.

• Does screen display

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH displayed,

disconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Does screen display

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 6.

3. • Lock doors using

driver’s snib button.

• Does screen display

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 4.

4. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C21, circuit

195 (Brown/Red wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Lock doors using

driver’s snib button.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. • Back probe driver’s

door actuator

connector YB57,

terminal 4, circuit 195

(Brown/Red wi re) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Lock doors using

driver’s snib button.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and repair

open in

circuit 195.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

6. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH displayed,

reconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Disconnect driver’s

door actuator

connector YB57.

• Does screen display

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Go to Step 7. Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

7. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH displayed,

disconnect LHF

passenger door

actuator connector

YB57.

• Does screen display

ACTUATOR LOCK

SWITCH LOCK?

Check and repair

short to earth in

circuit 195.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

PART E - UNLOCK DOORS, PASSENGER’S DOOR ACTUATORS (SNIB)

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Checks non operating passenger door snib unlock signal (earth) at non operating actuator when operating it’s

snib UNLOCK

2. Uses TECH 2 to check for false ACTUATOR UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK (passenger doors) signal.

3. Checks if false ACTUATOR UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal initiated by BCM.

5. Uses TECH 2 to check for ACTUATOR UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal at microprocessor of BCM while

operating each of the passenger door snibs.

6. Checks for ACTUATOR UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal at input to BCM while operating each of the

passenger door snibs.

7. Checks circuit 194.

8. Checks circuit 156 / each passenger door actuator

9. Checks if false ACTUATOR UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal initiated by any of the passenger door

actuators / short to earth in circuit 194.

10. Checks circuit 156 / passenger door actuator (non operating door actuator).

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • All doors locked.

• Unlock each

passenger door using

each snib button.

• Does at least one

passenger door snib

unlock all doors?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. • Back probe actuator

connector, terminal 3

of suspect door

actuator (unlock

switch), circuit 194

(Brown/Orange wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Operate suspect door

lock snib button.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Repair open in

circuit 194.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 10.

3. • All doors locked.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPALY.

• Scroll to ACTUATOR

UNLOCK SWITCH.

• Does screen display

ACTUATOR UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.

4. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

ACTUATOR UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed,

disconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Does screen display

ACTUATOR UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

5. • All doors unlocked.

• With TECH 2 still

connected and

ACTUATOR UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed

unlock each passenger

door using each snib

button.

• Does the screen

display ACTUATOR

UNLOCK SWITCH

UNLOCK for at least

one of the passenger

doors?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 6.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. • All doors unlocked.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C9, circuit 194

(Brown/Orange wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Unlock each doors

using each snib button.

• Is value as specified

for at least one of the

actuators?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 7.

7. • Back probe each

passenger door

actuator connector,

terminal 3, circuit 194

(Brown/Orange wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Unlock each

passenger doors using

each snib button.

• Is the reading as

specified for all

actuators?

Below

1 ohm Repair open in

circuit 194.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 8.

8. • Back probe each

passenger door

actuator connector,

terminal 5, circuit 156

(Black/Blu e wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is the reading as

specified for all

actuators?

Below

1 ohm Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Repair open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

9. • Reconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• With TECH 2 still

connected and

ACTUATOR UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed,

disconnect each

passenger door

actuator connector one

at a time.

• Does screen display

change from

ACTUATOR UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK to

ACTUATOR UNLOCK

SWITCH OFF when

disconnecting any of

the passenger door

actuator connectors?

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES

Check actuator

which caused

display to

change from

UNLOCK to OFF.

Check and repair

short to earth in

circuit 194.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • Back probe actuator

connector, terminal 5

of suspect door

actuator/s, circuit 156

(Black/Blu e wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Check suspect

actuator/s.

Repair open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

PART F - LOCK DOORS, LHF PASSENGER DOOR ACTUATOR (SNIB)

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Checks LHF passenger door snib lock signal (earth) when operating it’s snib button.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • All doors closed.

• Back probe LHF

passenger door

actuator connector

YB57, terminal 4,

circuit 195 (Brown/Red

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Unlock LHF passenger

door using it’s snib

button.

• Is the reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Repair open in

circuit 195.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Check LHF

passenger door

actuator.

PART G - UNLOCK TAILGATE

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Checks for unlock drive at rear compartment lock actuator when commanded by TECH 2.

2. Checks for earth at rear compartment lock actuator.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Doors and tailgate

locked.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TEST / CENTRAL

LOCK.

• Back probe tailgate

lock actuator

connector YR35,

terminal 1, circuit 294

(Black/Red wire) wi th a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Conduct door unlock

test as instructed by

TECH 2.

• Is the voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to Step 2. Repair open in

circuit 294

Recheck and

verify repair.

2. • Back probe tailgate

lock actuator

connector YR35,

terminal 2, circuit 295

(Black/Yellow wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace tailgate

lock actuator,

refer to Section

1A4 REAR

COMPARTMENT

LID AND

TAILGATE.

Check and repair

open in

circuit 295.

Recheck and

verify repair.

PART H - DEADLOCKING DOORS

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to check for false IGNITION ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

2. Checks for correct IGNITION SIGNAL at input of BCM.

3. Checks for deadlock drive at output of BCM when commanded by TECH 2.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Ignition OFF.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY and

scroll to IGNITION

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

IGNITION SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E20, circuit 39

(Pink/Bl ack wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Ignition

OFF

0 volts

Ignition

12 volts

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

short to

battery positive,

circuit 39 /

ignition switch.

3. • All doors unlocked /

closed.

• With TECH 2 still

connected, exit DATA

DISPLAY and select

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / CENTRAL

LOCK.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C12, circuit

394 (Violet/White wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Conduct test and

instructed by TECH 2

and deadlock doors.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

PART I - UNLOCKING DOORS FROM DEADLOCK

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Uses TECH 2 to unlock all doors (establish whether problem is with the output or the input of the BCM.

2. Uses TECH 2 to check for false DRIVERS UNLOCK signal.

3. Checks if false DRIVER’S UNLOCK signal initiated by BCM.

5. Checks for battery voltage at input to BCM.

6. Checks for high current earth at BCM.

7. Checks for earth to door actuators at output of BCM.

8. Checks for earth to door actuators at output of BCM.

9. Checks circuit 394.

10. Checks circuit 295.

11. Checks for driver’s door unlock drive at output of BCM when commanded by TECH 2.

12. Checks for passenger doors unlock drive at output of BCM when commanded by TECH 2.

13. Checks circuits 294 and 293 / all door actuators by commanding unlock via TECH 2.

14. Uses TECH 2 to check for DRIVER’S UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal at microprocessor of BCM.

15. Checks DRIVER’S UNLOCK SWITCH UNLOCK signal at input to BCM.

16. Checks circuit 193.

17. Checks circuit 156 / microswitch.

18. Checks if false DRIVER’S UNLOCK signal initiated by driver’s door actuator.

19. Checks if false DRIVER’S UNLOCK signal initiated by driver’s door lock microswitch / short to earth, circuit

193.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Doors deadlocked.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / CENTRAL

LOCK.

• Conduct all doors

unlock test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Do all doors unlock?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4.

2. • Doors unlocked.

• With TECH 2 still

connected, exit

MISCELLANEOUS

TEST and select

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DRIVER’S

UNLOCK SWITCH.

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 14.

3. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed,

disconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 18.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. • While conducting test

in Step 1, did at least

one passenger door

unlock?

Go to Step 9. Go to Step 5.

5. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B11, circuit

440 (Orange/Violet

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 6. Check and repair

circuit 440

(including

fuse F20).

Recheck and

verify repair.

6. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B10, circuit

151 (Black/Green wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 7. Check and repair

circuit 151.

Recheck and

verify repair.

7. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C12, circuit

394 (Violet/White wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 8. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C13, circuit

295 (Black/Yellow

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 9 Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • Back probe all door

actuator connectors

YB57/YB90, terminal

1, circuit 394

(Violet/White wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Go to Step 10 Check and repair

circuit 394.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • Back probe all door

actuator connectors

YB57/YB90, terminal

6, circuit 295

(Black/Yellow wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Go to Step 11. Check and repair

circuit 295.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

11. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C3, circuit 293

(Blue /Black wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TEST / CENTRAL

LOCK.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to Step 12. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

12. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C26, circuit

294 (Black/Red wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Repeat TECH 2

CENTRAL LOCK test

and lock doors.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to Step 13. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

13. • Back probe all door

actuator connectors

YB57/YB90, terminal

2, circuit 293

(Blue/Black wire) and

circuit 294 (Black/Red

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Repeat TECH 2

CENTRAL LOCK

TEST and unlock all

doors.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

for 0.7

seconds

Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES

Repair open in

circuit 293 or 294.

Recheck and

verify repair.

14. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed,

insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 15.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

15. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C20, circuit

193 (LGreen/Yellow

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 16.

16. • Back probe driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29, circuit

193 (LGreen/Yellow

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Repair open in

circuit 193.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 17.

17. • Back probe driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29, circuit

156 (Black/Blue wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace driver’s

door exterior

handle assembly,

refer Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Repair open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

18. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed,

reconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Disconnect driver’s

door actuator

connector YB57.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Go to Step 19. Go to door lock

actuator

adjustment

procedure in

Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

19. • With TECH 2 still

connected and

DRIVERS UNLOCK

SWITCH displayed

disconnect driver’s

door lock switch

connector YB29.

• Does screen display

DRIVER’S UNLOCK

SWITCH UNLOCK?

Check and repair

short in

circuit 193

(LGreen/

Yellow wire).

Replace driver’s

door exterior

handle assembly,

refer Section 1A5

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

4.4 THEFT DETERRENT

Figure 12J-2-129

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The theft deterrent system can be armed by pressing the lock button on the remote coded key when the driver’s

door is closed or passively armed automatically by the BCM 30 seconds after the ignition is switched off. When the

system is armed, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) prevents the engine from starting.

The theft deterrent system can be disarmed in three ways:

1. By pressing the unlock button on the remote coded key. This will unlock doors, turn the interior light on and

disarm the system for 30 seconds.

2. By inserting the remote coded key into the ignition switch cylinder and turning the ignition to the ON position.

This causes the BCM to read a security code serial data output from the remote coded key contact pin, via the

remote coded key reader assembly .

3. The system can also be disarmed by turning the ignition on for approximately two hours (timed override).

Should the system not disarm (theft deterrent LED off) when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position (ie. due

to a misaligned or faulty remote coded key reader or faulty remote coded key), then press the button on the remote

key to disarm the theft deterrent system.

The remote coded key is powered by it’s own internal battery. If the battery fails, the remote coded key can be

ON or START positions.

When pressing the lock button on the remote coded key to arm the system, the indicators will flash once and the

theft deterrent alert indicator (LED) will begin to flash.

When pressing the unlock button on the remote coded key to disarm the system, the indicators will flash twice and

the theft deterrent alert indicator (LED) will go out.

When the ignition is turned on, the BCM polls the PCM and sends an encrypted BCM remote coded key security

code (via the slip ring or remote receiver in the event of no slip ring communication).

The PCM compares the received security code with its stored security code (configured in production or via TECH

2) and if the codes match, the PCM will enable injector fuelling and engine crank.

The PCM will return an OK TO START message which tells the BCM to jump from the SHORT LOOP mode to the

LONG LOOP mode.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers diagnostic chart.

1-10 Functional check of system.

11. Checks if doors are not locking due to central door locking system or remote receiver/remote key.

12. Re-synchronisation of remote key rolling code in event of rolling code misalignment.

14. Uses TECH 2 to operate indicators (establish whether problem is with the BCM or other external problem).

15. Checks turn signal input at input to BCM.

16. Checks turn signal output at output of BCM when commanded by TECH 2.

17. Uses TECH 2 to operate the theft deterrent LED (establish whether problem is with the BCM or other external

problem).

18. Checks for theft deterrent LED output drive form the BCM when commanded by TECH 2.

19. Checks circuit 263 for short to earth, causing LED to be inoperative.

20. Checks circuit 263.

21. Checks circuit 155 for open to establish if circuit is faulty or theft deterrent LED is faulty.

22. Checks if problem is confined to the key reader or remote serial data transfer.

23. Checks for poor remote coded key shaft earth contact.

24. Checks for poor contact of remote coded key pin with remote coded key reader.

25. By using second ‘good’ key, determines if problem is with remote key.

26. Checks for BCM signal at remote key reader.

27. Checks ignition switch/cylinder earth.

28. Uses TECH 2 to check IGNITION ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

29. Checks circuit 229 for open to establish if circuit is faulty or BCM is faulty.

30. Checks circuit 229 for short to earth.

31. Checks ignition ON signal at input to BCM.

32. Uses TECH 2 to check for PASSIVE MODE OFF signal at microprocessor of BCM to establish if fault is with

the BCM or PCM.

Figure 12J-2-130

Figure 12J-2-131

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Close and lock all

doors.

• Operate remote key

UNLOCK button within

4 meters of the driver’s

side B pillar.

• Does the driver’s door

unlock (2 stage

unlocking

programmed) or all

doors unlock (single

stage unlocking

programmed)?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 11.

2. • In Step 1, did all

indicator lights flash

twice (both left-hand

and right-hand sides)?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 13.

3. • In Step 1, did the

dome lamp illuminate? Go to Step 4. Go to dome

lamp delay

diagnosis, refer

to 4.14 DOME

LAMP DELAY

CONTROL in

this Section.

4. • In Step 1, did the theft

deterrent LED go out

immediately and begin

flashing 30 seconds

latter.

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 17.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. • Close all doors.

• Arm theft deterrent

system by operating

the LOCK button on

the remote coded key

within 4 metres of the

driver’s side B pillar.

• Did all doors lock?

Go to Step 6. Go to central

door locking

diagnosis, refer

to 4.3 CENTRAL

DOOR

LOCKING in this

Section.

6. • In Step 5, did the

dome lamp go out

immediately upon

activating the lock

button?

Go to Step 7. Go to dome

lamp delay

diagnosis, refer

to 4.14 DOME

LAMP DELAY

CONTROL in

this Section.

7. • In Step 5, did all

indicator lights flash

once (both left-hand

and right-hand sides)?

Go to Step 8. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • Is the theft deterrent

LED flashing? Go to Step 9. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • Unlock vehicle with

remote key and wait

for theft deterrent

system to passively

arm (theft deterrent

LED flashing).

• With vehicle passively

armed, insert the

ignition key into ignition

switch and turn to the

ON position.

• Does the theft

deterrent LED

extinguish?

Go to Step 10. Go to Step 22.

10. • Turn the ignition key to

the START position.

• Does the vehicle crank

and start?

System OK. Go to Step 32.

11. • Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and operate

door unlock

microswitch (turn key

to unlock position).

• Do all doors unlock?

NOTE: Alarm will sound.

Go to Step 12. Go to central

door locking

diagnosis, refer

to 4.3 CENTRAL

DOOR

LOCKING in this

Section.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

12. • Insert ignition key into

ignition switch and

cycle from OFF - ON -

OFF.

• Remove key and lock

doors with driver’s door

lock cylinder switch.

• Operate UNLOCK

button on remote key

within 4 metres of

driver’s door B pillar.

• Does the driver’s door

unlock (2 stage

unlocking

programmed) or all

doors unlock (single

stage unlocking

programmed)?

Go to Step 2. Go to remote

receiver

diagnosis, refer

4.20 REMOTE

RECEIVER/KEY

in this Section.

13. • In Step 2, did at least

one side of vehicle’s

indicators flash twice

(either left-hand or

right-hand side)?

Go to Step 16. Go to Step 15

14. • Driver’s door closed.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / LAMPS /

INDICATORS.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Do all indicator lights

illuminate?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 15.

15. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B5, circuit 140

(Orange/Red wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

12 volts Go to Step 16. Check and

repair open in

circuit 140

(including

fuse F7).

Recheck and

verify repair.

16. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B4 and B12,

circuits 14 (Light Blue

wire and Blue wire

respectively) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Repeat INDICATOR

ILLUMINATION test as

per Step 15.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

12 volts Check and

repair circuits 14

(LH indicator)

and/or 15 (RH

indicator).

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

17. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / SECURITY

SYSTEM / SECURITY

LED.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Does theft deterrent

LED illuminate?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 18

18. • Back probe BCM

connector YB176,

terminal A6, circuit 263

(Light Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth

• Repeat SECURITY

LED test as per Step

17.

• Are voltages as

specified?

Approx.

5 volts -

LED on

Approx.

0 volts -

LED off

Go to Step 20. Go to Step 19

19. • Back probe BCM

connector YB176,

terminal A6, circuit 263

(Light Blue wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and

repair short in

circuit 263.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

20. • Back probe theft

deterrent LED

connector YB56, circuit

263 (Light Blue wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth

• Repeat SECURITY

LED test as per Step

17.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

12 volts Go to Step 21. Check and

repair open in

circuit 263.

Recheck and

verify repair.

21. • Back probe theft

deterrent LED

connector YB56, circuit

263 (Light Blue wire)

with a Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace theft

deterrent LED,

refer 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHER &

HORN.

Repair open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

22. • With the ignition key in

the ON position,

operate the unlock

button on the remote

coded key.

• Does the theft

deterrent LED go out?

Go to Step 23. Go to remote

receiver

diagnosis, refer

to 4.20

REMOTE

RECEIVER/KEY

in this Section.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

23. • Remove remote key,

key shaft.

• Clean earth contact

(shaft earth).

• Reinstall key shaft and

tighten screws to the

correct torque

specification (0.7 - 0.9

Nm).

• With system passively

armed (theft deterrent

LED flashing), insert

key into ignition switch

and turn key to the ON

position.

• Does the theft

deterrent LED go out?

Go to Step 10. Go to Step 24.

24. • Turn ignition key to the

ON position.

• Visually check to see if

remote coded key

contact pin is making

good contact with

remote key reader (slip

ring).

• Is remote coded key

contact pin making

good contact?

Go to Step 25. Check and

repair as

necessary:

remote key

reader (slip ring),

alignment of

remote key

reader (refer

step 12), length

of key shaft and

remote key

contact pin.

25. • Check function of

second remote key.

• •Is second key

OK?

Replace suspect

key. Go to Step 26.

26. • Isolate remote coded

key contact pin (use a

thick piece of paper to

cover contact pin).

• Insert key into ignition

switch and turn key to

the ON position.

• Measure voltage at the

remote coded key

reader (slip ring) to a

sound earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Fluctuates

between

4 - 6 volts

Go to Step 27. Go to Step 28.

27. • Check ignition switch

earth using an

Ohmmeter connected

between the ignition

switch housing a

sound earth point.

• Is value as specified?

Below

100 ohms Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and

repair open or

poor earth

connection at

ignition switch /

cylinder,

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

28. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Turn ignition ON as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Scroll to IGNITION

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

IGNITION SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 29. Go to Step 31.

29. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E1, circuit 229

(Violet/Red wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• With remote coded key

contact pin isolated

(covered with thick

paper), insert ignition

key into ignition switch

and turn ignition switch

to the ON position.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Fluctuates

between

4 - 6 volts -

Check and

repair open in

circuit 229

or remote

key reader.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 30.

30. • Check circuit 229

(Violet/Red wire) for

short to earth.

• Is circuit 229 OK?

Check and

repair short in

circuit 229.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

31. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E20, circuit 39

(Pink/Bl ack wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and

repair open in

circuit 39

(including

fuse F14).

Recheck and

verify repair.

32. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to PASSIVE

MODE.

• With system disarmed

(theft deterrent LED

off), does the screen

display PASSIVE

MODE OFF?

Go to PCM

diagnostics in

Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT

- V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT

- V8 ENGINE.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in this

Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.5 ENTRY DETERRENT

Figure 12J-2-132

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The entry deterrent system, incorporated in the BCM, is designed to deter unwanted access to the vehicle's

passenger compartment by providing audible and visual warning (alarm) of illegal entry to the vehicle.

Arming of the theft and entry deterrent systems is by pressing the lock button on the remote coded key.

NOTE:

The entry deterrent system does not arm passively.

The remote coded key also incorporates a boot release function button.

An ultrasonic sensor option can also be fitted to the vehicle.

Arming Operation

The entry deterrent system is armed by pressing the lock button on the remote coded key. The output signal from

the key, via the remote receiver, activates the microprocessor within the BCM (via circuit 266), providing that the

ignition is OFF and the vehicle road speed input indicates speed is zero. Note that one continuous press of a button

on the remote coded key should cause only one arm/disarm operation. It is not possible to arm the system or

remote lock the doors with the driver's door open.

When the system is armed, the following actions take place:

1. All doors lock (and tailgate on Berlina station wagon).

2. All indicator lights flash once.

3. The power antenna retracts.

4. The power window system deactivates.

5. The dome light is switched off (provided it has not been turned on by another system).

6. The theft deterrent alert indicator LED flashes (refer to theft deterrent system operation description).

Triggered Operation

Once the entry deterrent system is armed, it is triggered by any one of the following inputs:

1. The bonnet being opened (circuit 260).

2. The boot being opened (circuit 162).

3. Any door being opened (circuit 126).

4. Ignition being switched on (circuit 39).

If any of the previous conditions exist at the time of the system arming, they will be ignored until the fault condition is

cleared.

Once triggered, the system will operate as follows:

1. Flash all indicator lights at a rate of one flash every two seconds.

2. Pulse all vehicle horns at a rate of one pulse per second.

3. Flash the dome light at a rate of one flash every two seconds.

Flashing of the indicators and dome lamp, and sounding of the horn/s will continue for a period of 30 seconds.

Disarming Procedure

The system is disarmed by:

A. Pressing the unlock button on the remote coded key. The RF output signal from remote coded key, via the

remote receiver, activates the microprocessor within the BCM (via circuit 266).

Upon disarming the following actions take place:

1. All doors (and tailgate on Berlina station wagon) unlock.

2. All indicators lights flash twice, however if the system has been triggered since being armed, they will flash

three times.

3. The dome light is activated for 30 seconds (normal delay cancellation conditions apply).

4. If the system has been triggered since being armed, the theft deterrent alert indicator LED will flash a code

indicating the triggered source, otherwise it will be turned off. This flashing code will be cancelled once the

ignition is switched on.

B. If the remote coded key is not working (eg. flat battery), turning the ignition on allows the BCM to provide a

power supply to the remote coded key to enable reading of the key security code.

Flash Codes

The system triggered flash codes emitted by the theft deterrent alert indicator LED flash at a defined flash rate with

a 1.5 second between codes. Codes are repeated twice before moving to the next code.

Two flashes - bonnet (or ultrasonic sensor)

Three flashes - boot

Four flashes - passenger door

Five flashes - driver's door

Six flashes - ignition on

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-15. Functional check of system to help isolate fault.

16. Uses TECH 2 to check DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN signal at microprocessor at BCM.

17. Checks DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN signal at input to BCM.

18. Uses TECH 2 to activate entry deterrent horn to determine if fault is with output of BCM.

19. Uses TECH 2 to activate the horn to determine if fault is with input or output of BCM.

20. Checks theft deterrent horn output drive from BCM.

21. Checks circuit 1128.

22. Checks theft deterrent relay.

23. Checks horn drive from BCM.

24. Checks circuit 28.

25. Checks horn relay.

26. Determines if fault is with individual passenger door jamb switch.

27. Uses TECH 2 to check PASSENGER DOOR OPEN signal at microprocessor of BCM.

28. Checks PASSENGER DOOR OPEN signal at input to BCM.

29. Uses TECH 2 to check BOOT OPEN signal at microprocessor of BCM.

30. Checks BOOT OPEN signal at input to BCM.

31. Checks circuit 162 and boot lamp switch (including earth).

32. Uses TECH 2 to check BONNET OPEN signal at microprocessor of BCM.

33. Checks BONNET OPEN signal at input to BCM.

34. Checks circuit 260 and bonnet switch (including earth).

35. Uses TECH 2 to check IGNITION ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

36. Checks IGNITION ON signal at input to BCM.

Figure 12J-2-133

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Ensure all windows are

in the down position.

• Close all doors.

• Arm the system by

operating the LOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Do all doors lock?

Go to Step 2. Go to central door

locking system

diagnosis, refer to

4.3 CENTRAL

DOOR LOCKING

in this Section.

2. • When the LOCK

button on the remote

coded key was

pressed in Step 1, did

all indicators flash at

once?

Go to Step 3. Go to theft

deterrent

diagnosis, refer to

4.4 THEFT

DETERRENT

SYSTEM in this

Section.

3. • When the LOCK

button on the remote

coded key was

pressed in Step 1, did

the theft deterrent LED

begin to flash

(assuming vehicle was

fully disarmed)?

Go to Step 4. Go to theft

deterrent

diagnosis, refer to

4.4 THEFT

DETERRENT

SYSTEM in this

Section.

4. • Lift driver’s door snib

and open driver’s door.

• Is horn triggered?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 16.

5. • In Step 4, does both

the theft deterrent horn

and standard vehicle

horns sound?

Go to Step 6. Go to Step 18.

6. • In Step 4, do both

indicators and dome

lamp flash once every

two seconds?

Go to Step 7. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

7. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Do indicators flash 3

times and the theft

deterrent LED emit a

flash code of five?

Go to Step 8. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

8. • Turn ignition from OFF

- ON - OFF to cancel

flash code (set in Step

4).

• Arm the system by

pressing the LOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Test front passenger

door input by opening

the passenger door to

trigger alarm, then

disarm the system by

operating the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key. Observe

the theft deterrent LED

flash code, then cancel

the code by cycling the

ignition (OFF - ON -

OFF).

• Repeat this action for

both the rear

passenger doors.

• Does the opening of

each passenger door

(when system is

armed) trigger alarm?

Go to Step 9. Go to Step 26.

9. • While observing the

flash code in Step 8,

did the theft deterrent

LED emit a flash code

of four for each

passenger door?

Go to step 10. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • Arm the system by

pressing the LOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Open the boot using

the ignition key in the

lock.

• Is alarm triggered?

Go to Step 11. Go to Step 29.

11. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Is the theft deterrent

LED emitting a flash

code of three?

Go to Step 12. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

12. • Arm the system by

pressing the LOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Open the bonnet.

• Is alarm triggered?

Go to Step 13. Go to Step 32.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

13. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Is the theft deterrent

LED emitting a flash

code of two?

Go to Step 14. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

14. • Arm the system by

pressing the LOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Place a thick piece of

paper over the slip ring

contact pin on the

remote coded key.

• From outside the

vehicle (doors closed),

insert the key into the

ignition switch and turn

to the ON position.

• Is the alarm triggered?

Go to Step 15. Go to Step 35.

15. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Is the theft deterrent

LED emitting a flash

code of six?

System OK. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

16. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DRIVERS

DOOR screen display.

• Open and close the

driver’s door.

• Does the screen

display the state of the

driver’s door (open or

closed)?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 17.

17. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C8, circuit 126

(Grey/White wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Open and close the

driver’s door.

• Are voltages as

specified?

Door

open -

0 volts

Door

closed -

3 volts

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

circuit 126 and

driver’s door

jamb switch.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

18. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / SECURITY

SYSTEM / THEFT

HORN.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Does the theft

deterrent system horn

sound?

Go to Step 19. Go to Step 20.

19. • With TECH 2

connected, select

BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / HORN.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Does the vehicle horn

sound?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 23.

20. • Back probe BCM

connector YB176,

terminal A3, circuit

1128 (Black/White

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Repeat THEFT HORN

test as per Step 18.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

1 volt

Approx

12 volts

OFF

Go to Step 21. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

21. • Back probe theft

deterrent horn relay

connector YE107,

terminal 2, circuit 1128

(Black/White wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Repeat THEFT HORN

test as per Step 18.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

1 volt

Approx

12 volts

OFF

Go to Step 22. Check and repair

open in

circuit 1128.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

22. • Replace theft deterrent

horn relay with a

known functional one.

• Repeat Step 18 again.

• Does the theft

deterrent horn sound?

Replace horn

relay.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

fuse F21, circuits

1340 and

129 or theft

deterrent horn.

Recheck and

verify repair.

23. • Back probe BCM

connector YB176,

terminal A4, circuit 28

(Black/Yellow wire)

with a jumper lead to

earth.

• Does the horn sound?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 24.

24. • Back probe horn relay

connector YE41,

terminal 85, circuit 28

(Black/Yellow wire)

with a jumper lead to

earth.

• Does the horn sound?

Check and repair

open in circuit 28.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 25.

25. • Replace horn relay

with a known functional

one.

• Repeat Step 24 again.

• Do standard vehicle

horns sound?

Replace horn

relay.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

fuse F25, circuits

940 and

29 or horn.

Recheck and

verify repair.

26. • In Step 8, did at least

one passenger door

trigger the alarm?

Check and repair

fault in circuit 125

between suspect

door and door

jamb switch of

suspect door.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 27.

27. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to PASSENGER

DOOR screen display.

• Open and close the

passenger door.

• Does the screen

display state the status

of the door (ie.

Open/closed)?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 28.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

28. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C7, circuit 125

(White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Open any passenger

door.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volt Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in

circuit 125.

Recheck and

verify repair.

29. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to BOOT

SWITCH screen

display.

• Open and close the

boot lid.

• Does the screen

display state the of the

boot switch (will display

open when boot lid

closed)?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 30.

30. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C6, circuit 162

(Black/Green wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Open boot.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 31.

31. • Back probe boot lamp

switch connector YR5,

circuit 162

(Black/Green wire)

with a Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Open boot.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and repair

open in circuit

162. Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and

repair/replace

boot switch

(including

switch earth).

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

32. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• •Connect TECH 2

to the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to BONNET

SWITCH screen

display.

• Open and close

bonnet.

• Does the screen

display the state of the

bonnet switch (will

display open when

bonnet is closed)?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 33.

33. • Disconnect BCM

connector YB175 and

back probe harness

end of terminals E23

and E21, circuits 260

(Black/Yellow wire)

and 261 (Red/White

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Open bonnet.

• Are values as

specified?

Below

1 ohm

(both

circuits)

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 34.

34. • Reconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Open Bonnet.

• Back probe bonnet

switch connector YE2,

circuit 260

(Black/Yellow wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and repair

open in circuits

260 and/or 261.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and

repair/replace

bonnet switch

(including

switch earth).

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

35. • Disarm the alarm by

pressing the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to IGNITION

SWITCH screen

display.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Does the screen

display IGNITION ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 36.

36. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E20, circuit 39

(Pink/Bl ack wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts

(ignition

on)

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in circuit 39

(including fuse

F14 and

ignition switch).

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.6 BOOT RELEASE

Figure 12J-2-134

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The rear compartment lock actuator is controlled by pressing the rear compartment lock switch located in the glove

compartment. The BCM will monitor the rear compartment lock switch and inhibit the boot release if the vehicle

speed is above 15 km/h.

Techline

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Functional check to determine if system is functioning correctly or if faulty, determines if fault is with remote

receiver/key or with boot release system.

3. circuit 155 and rear compartment lock switch. Uses TECH 2 to operate the rear compartment lock actuator to

establish whether problem is with the input or output of BCM.

4. Uses TECH 2 to check BOOT RELEASE SWITCH ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

5. Checks for rear compartment lock actuator drive signal at the output of the BCM when commanded by TECH

6. Checks circuit 142.

7. Checks circuit 156 and rear compartment lock actuator.

8. Checks for battery voltage supply at BCM (turn signal / boot solenoid supply).

9. Checks for BOOT SWITCH signal at input of BCM.

10. Checks circuit 1144.

11. Checks

Figure 12J-2-135

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Activate boot release

button in glove

compartment with

vehicle speed below 15

km/h.

• Does the rear

compartment lid open?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 3.

2. • Close rear compartment

lid.

• Press the boot release

button on the remote

coded key (within 2

metres of the rear of the

vehicle).

• Does rear compartment

lid open?

System OK. Go to remote

receiver

diagnosis, refer to

4.20 REMOTE

RECEIVER/KEY

in this Section.

3. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / SECURITY

SYSTEM / BOOT

RELEASE.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Does rear compartment

lid open?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 5.

4. • With TECH 2 still

connected, exit

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS and select

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to BOOT

RELEASE SWITCH

screen display.

• Press boot release

button in glove

compartment.

• Does the screen display

change to BOOT

RELEASE SWITCH

ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

5. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C25, circuit 142

(Red/Green wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Repeat BOOT

RELEASE test as per

Step 3.

• Are voltages as

specified?

Test not

conducted:

0 volt

Test

conducted:

12 volts

Go to Step 6. Go to Step 8.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. • Back probe actuator

connector YR6, circuit

142 (Red/Green wire)

with Voltmeter to earth.

• Repeat BOOT

RELEASE test as per

Step 3.

• Are voltages as

specified?

Test not

conducted:

0 volt

Test

conducted:

12 volts

Go to Step 7. Repair open or

short in

circuit 142.

Recheck and

verify repair.

7. • Back probe actuator

connector YR6 circuit

156 (Black/Blue wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace rear

compartment lock

actuator, refer to

Section 1A4

REAR

COMPARTMENT

LID AND

TAILGATE.

Repair open in

circuit 156

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B5, circuit 140

(Orange/Red wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

Battery + Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open or short in

circuit 140

(including

fuse F7).

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E22, circuit

1144 (Black/Red wire)

with a Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Activate the boot

release button.

• is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 10.

10. • Back probe rear

compartment lock

switch connector YB13,

circuit 1144 (Black/Red

wire) with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Activate the rear

compartment lock

switch.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Repair open or

short in circuit

1144. Recheck

circuit to verify

repair.

Go to Step 11.

11. • Back probe rear

compartment lock

switch connector, YB13,

circuit 155 (Black/Yellow

wire) with an Ohmmeter

to earth.

• Is reading as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace rear

compartment lock

switch, refer to

Section 1A4

REAR

COMPARTMENT

LID AND

TAILGATE.

Repair open in

circuit 155.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.7 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Figure 12J-2-136

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The BCM controls the positive power supply to all window motors and the automatic down of the driver’s door

window which is activated when the driver’s power window down button is depressed for more than 0.4 seconds.

Once activated, the automatic down feature is cancelled by pulling the driver’s power window switch upwards and

releasing it. In this case, the window will remain stationary until another activation takes place (up or down button

activated).

With the ignition ON, power is supplied to the window system continuously. When the ignition is switched OFF and

no door has been opened, power is supplied to the window system for a maximum of one hour. In the event of any

door being opened, power is supplied to the system for 45 seconds maximum, timed from when the first door was

opened.

When the doors are remotely unlocked (using the remote coded key) power is supplied to the system for 45

seconds. The delay is cancelled when the doors are locked by the remote coded key.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-17. Functional check of system.

20. Checks for driver’s window down input signal at input of BCM/circuit 167.

21. Checks driver’s window down relay and contacts within BCM.

22. Checks circuit 673.

23. Checks driver’s window motor.

24. Checks for driver’s window down input signal at output of the front and rear door power window switch

assembly.

25. Checks circuit 672 (front and rear door power window switch assembly).

26. Uses TECH 2 to check the ignition input at the microprocessor of the BCM.

27. Checks the power window relay output drive signal at the BCM.

28. Checks for power window system voltage at the input of the BCM.

29. Checks circuit 1240.

30. Checks circuit 156.

31. Checks for ignition signal at input of BCM.

32. Checks circuit 173.

33. Checks circuit 440.

34. Checks circuit 340.

35. Checks power window relay.

36. Checks driver’s window up signal at output of front and rear door power window switch assembly.

37. Checks front and rear door power window switch assembly .

38. Checks circuit 672 (front and rear door power window switch assembly to BCM).

39. Uses TECH 2 to check the DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN signal input at the microprocessor of the BCM.

40. Checks for DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN signal at the input of the BCM.

41. Checks circuit 126.

42. Uses TECH 2 to check PASSENGER DOOR OPEN signal input at the microprocessor of the BCM.

44. Checks for PASSENGER DOOR OPEN signal at the input of the BCM.

45. Checks front and rear door power window switch assembly (LHF window down).

46. Checks circuit 667.

47. Checks front and rear door power window switch assembly (LHF window down, earth).

48. Checks circuit 666.

49. Checks front and rear door power window switch assembly (RHR window down).

50. Checks circuit 170 (RHR window system).

51. Checks RHR power window switch (RHR door).

52. Checks circuit 671 (RHR window system).

53. Checks front and rear door power window switch assembly (RHR window down, earth).

54. Checks circuit 171 (RHR window system).

55. Checks RHR power window switch (RHR door).

56. Checks circuit 670 (RHR window system).

57. Checks front and rear door power window switch assembly (LHR window down).

58. Checks circuit 170 (LHR window system).

59. Checks LHR power window switch (LHR DOOR).

60. Checks circuit 671 (LHR window system).

61. Checks front and rear door power window switch assembly(LHR window down, earth).

62. Checks circuit 171 (LHR window system).

63 Checks LHR power window switch (LHR door).

64. Checks circuit 670 (LHR window system.

66. Checks override switch (front and rear door power window switch assembly).

67. Checks circuit 172 (RHR window system).

69. Checks circuit 172 (LHR window system).

70. Checks for false output drive from BCM or wiring / relay problem causing window system ON always.

NOTE:

This diagnostic chart assumes that the power windows are free from mechanical faults, ie. damaged window

regulator or badly worn guide channel rubbers.

Figure 12J-2-137

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate driver’s

window down button

for one second and

release.

• Does the window travel

all the way down

automatically?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 18.

2. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate the driver’s

window up button.

• Does the window travel

up when activating the

button?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 36.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

3. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate driver’s

window down button

for one second and

release.

• As the window is

travelling down

automatically, operate

the up button

momentarily and

release.

• Does the window stop?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 38.

4. • All doors closed.

• Ignition OFF.

• Remotely lock doors.

• Is power supply to

window system

interrupted (green

indicator lights in front

and rear power window

switch extinguished)?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 70.

5. • Remotely unlock

doors.

• Is power supplied to

the window system

(green indicator lights

in front and rear power

window switch

illuminated)?

Go to Step 6. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

6. • Doors closed.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Ignition OFF.

• Open driver’s door.

• Is power to the window

system interrupted

after 45 seconds

(green indicator lights

in front and rear power

window switch

extinguished)?

Go to Step 7. Go to Step 39.

7. • Doors closed.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Ignition OFF.

• Open any passenger

door.

• Is power to the window

system interrupted

after 45 seconds

(green indicator lights

in front and rear power

window switch

extinguished)?

Go to Step 8. Go to Step 42.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

8. • Ignition ON.

• Operate LHF power

window down button

(front and rear door

power window switch).

• Does LHF window

travel down?

Go to Step 9. Go to Step 45.

9. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHF power

window up button

(front and rear door

power window switch).

• Does LHF window

travel up?

Go to Step 10. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

10. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate RHR power

window down button

on front and rear door

power window switch.

• Does RHR window

travel down?

Go to Step 11. Go to Step 49.

11. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate RHR power

window up button on

front and rear door

power window switch.

• Does RHR window

travel up?

Go to Step 12. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

12. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR power

window down button

on front and rear door

power window switch.

• Does LHR window

travel down?

Go to Step 13. Go to Step 57.

13. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR power

window up button on

front and rear door

power window switch.

• Does LHR window

travel up?

Go to Step 14. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

14. • Ensure power window

override switch is off.

• Ignition ON.

• Operate RHR window

down button on RHR

door.

• Does RHR window

travel down?

Go to Step 15. Go to Step 65.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

15. • Ensure power window

override switch is off.

• Ignition ON.

• Operate RHR window

up button on RHR

door.

• Does RHR window

travel up?

Go to Step 16. Replace RHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

16. • Ensure power window

override switch is off.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR power

window down button

on LHR door.

• Does LHR window

travel down?

Go to Step 17. Go to Step 68.

17. • Ensure power window

override switch is off.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR power

window up button on

LHR door.

• Does LHR window

travel up?

System OK. Replace LHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

18. • Turn ignition ON.

• Are green indicator

lights illuminated in the

front and rear door

power window switch?

Go to Step 19. Go to Step 26.

19. • Turn ignition ON.

• Operate the driver’s

window button.

• Does the driver’s

window travel down

whilst holding the

button down?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 20.

20. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C14, circuit

167 (Green/Black wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate the driver’s

window down button.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 21. Go to Step 24.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

21. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C2, circuit 673

(Green/Orange wire)

with voltage to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate the driver’s

window down button

for more than one

second.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 22. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

22. • Back probe driver’s

window motor

connector, YB18,

circuit 673

(Green/Orange wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Operate the driver’s

window down button

for more than one

second.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 23. Repair open in

circuit 673.

Recheck and

verify repair.

23. • Back probe driver’s

window motor

connector YB18, circuit

672 (Blue/White wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth (switch in rest

position).

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace driver’s

window motor

assembly, refer to

Section 1A5

FRONT & REAR

DOOR

ASSEMBLIES

Go to Step 25.

24. • Back probe the front

and rear door power

window switch

assembly connector

YB98, terminal 8,

circuit 167

(Green/Black wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate driver’s

window down button.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Repair open in

circuit 167.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

25. • Back probe the front

and rear door power

window switch

assembly connector

YB98, terminal 9,

circuit 672 (Blue/White

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Repair open in

circuit 672.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

26. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to IGNITION

SWITCH.

• Turn ignition OFF.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Does screen switch

from IGNITION

SWITCH ON to

IGNITION SWITCH

OFF and back to

IGNITION SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 27. Go to Step 31.

27. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B2 circuit 173

(Yellow wire) with a

jumper lead to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Are the green indicator

lights in the front and

rear window switches

illuminated?

0 volt Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 28.

28. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C21, circuit

1240(Orange/Yellow

wire) with a voltmeter

to earth.

• Turn ignition ON

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 29. Go to Step 32.

29. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

assembly connector

YB98, terminal 4 circuit

1240 (Orange/Yellow

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 30. Repair open in

circuit 1240.

Recheck and

verify repair.

30. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

assembly connector

YB98, terminal 5 circuit

156 (Black/Blue wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

Repair open in

circuit 156.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

31. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E20 circuit 39

(Pink/Bl ack wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

fault in circuit 39

(including

fuse F14).

Recheck and

verify repair.

32. • Back probe power

window relay

connector YB120,

terminal 85 circuit 173

(Yellow wire) with a

jumper lead to earth.

• Are the green indicator

lights in the front and

rear window switches

illuminated?

Repair open in

circuit 173.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 33.

33. • Back probe power

window relay

connector YB120,

terminal 86 circuit 440

(Orange/Violet wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 34. Check and repair

fault in circuit 440

(including

fuse F20).

Recheck and

verify repair.

34. • Back probe power

window relay

connector YB120,

terminal 87 circuit 340

(Orange/Green wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 35. Check and repair

fault in circuit 340

(including fuse F1

- check for

excessive current

in circuit if fuse F1

is tripped).

Recheck and

verify repair.

35. • Back probe power

window relay

connector YB120,

terminal 30 circuit

1240 (Orange/Yellow

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Repair open in

circuit 1240.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace power

window relay

Recheck and

verify repair.

36. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 9 circuit 672

(Blue /White wire) w ith

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate the driver’s

window up button.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 37. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

ACTION VALUE YES NO

STEP

37. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 8 circuit 167

(Green/Black wire)

with a Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer 2.20 FRONT

AND REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

38. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C16 circuit

672 (Blue/White wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate the driver’s

window up button.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair open in

circuit 672.

Recheck and

verify repair.

39. • Driver’s door closed.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DRIVER’S

DOOR CLOSED.

• Open driver’s door.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS DOOR

OPEN?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 40.

40. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C8, circuit 126

(Grey/White wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Driver’s door open.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volt Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 41.

41. • Back probe driver’s

door jamb switch

connector YB1, circuit

126 (Grey/White wire)

and BCM connector

YB173, terminal C8,

circuit 126 (Grey/White

wire) with an

Ohmmeter.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace driver’s

door jamb switch,

refer to 2.9 DOOR

JAMB

SWITCHES.

Repair open in

circuit 1126.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

42. • Passenger doors

closed.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to PASSENGER

DOORS CLOSED.

• Open and close each

passenger door while

watching TECH 2

screen display.

• Does screen display

PASSENGER DOOR

OPEN for every door

as it is opened?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 43.

43. • In Step 42, did screen

display PASSENGER

DOOR OPEN for at

least one of the

passenger doors?

Check and

replace faulty

door jamb

switch/circuit,

refer to 2.9 DOOR

JAMB

SWITCHES in

this Section

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 44.

44. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C7, circuit 125

(White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Open any passenger

door.

• Is voltage as

specified?

0 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair open in

circuit 125

Recheck and

verify repair.

45. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 1 circuit 667

(Green wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 46. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

46. • Back probe LHF

window motor

connector YB19, circuit

667 (Green wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHF window

down switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 47. Repair open in

circuit 666.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

47. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 13 circuit 667

(Green wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 48. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

48. • Back probe LHF

window motor

connector YB19, circuit

666 (Blue wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace LHF

window motor

assembly, refer to

Section 1A5

FRONT & REAR

DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Repair open in

circuit 666.

Recheck and

verify repair.

49. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 6, circuit 170

(Blue /Yel low wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate RHR power

window down button

on the front and rear

door power window

switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 50. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

50. • Back probe RHR

power window switch

connector YB37 (at

RHR door) terminal 3,

circuit 170

(Blue /Yel low wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate RHR power

window down button

on the front and rear

door power window

switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 51. Repair open in

circuit 170.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

51. • •Back probe RHR

power window switch

connector YB37 (at

RHR door) terminal 4,

circuit 671 (Blue wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate RHR power

window down button

on the front and rear

door power window

switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 52. Replace RHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

52. • Back probe RHR

window motor

connector YB21, circuit

671 (Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate RHR power

window down button

on the front and rear

door power window

switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 53. Repair open in

circuit 671.

Recheck and

verify repair.

53. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 7, circuit 171

(Green/Yellow wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 54. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

54. • Back probe RHR

power window switch

connector (at the RHR

door) YB37, circuit 171

(Green/Yellow wire)

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 55. Repair open in

circuit 171.

Recheck and

verify repair.

55. • Back probe RHR

power window switch

connector (at RHR

door) YB37 terminal 2,

circuit 670 (Green

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 56. Replace RHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

56. • Back probe RHR

window motor

connector YB21, circuit

670 (Green wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace RHR

window motor,

refer to

Section 1A5

FRONT & REAR

DOOR

ASSEMBLIES.

Repair open in

circuit 670.

Recheck and

verify repair.

57. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 2, circuit 168,

(Blue/Red wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR window

button on front and

rear door power

window switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 58. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

58. • Back probe LHR

power window switch

connector YB37,

terminal 3, circuit 170

(Blue /Yel low wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR window

button on front and

rear door power

window switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 59 Repair open in

circuit 170

Recheck and

verify repair.

59. • Back probe LHR

power window switch

connector YB37,

terminal 4, circuit 671

(Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR window

button on front and

rear door power

window switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 60. Replace LHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

60. • Back probe LHR

window motor

connector YB21, circuit

671 (Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Operate LHR window

down button at front

and rear door power

window switch

• Is reading as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 61. Repair open in

circuit 671.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

61. • Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 3, circuit 169

(Green/Red wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 62. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

62. • Back probe LHR

window switch

connector (at LHR

door) YB37, circuit 171

(Green/Yellow wire

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 63. Repair open in

circuit 171

Recheck and

verify repair.

63. • Back probe LHR

window switch

connector (at LHR

door) YB37, terminal 2,

circuit 670 (Green

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is the value as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 64. Replace LHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section

64. • Back probe LHR

window motor

connector YB21, circuit

670 (Green wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace LHR

window motor,

refer to

Section 1A5

FRONT & REAR

DOOR

ASSEMBLIES

Repair open in

circuit 670

Recheck and

verify repair.

65. • Turn ignition ON.

• Is the green indicator

light illuminated the

RHR door power

window switch?

Replace RHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

Go to Step 66.

66. • Turn ignition ON.

• Ensure power window

override switch is off.

• Back probe front and

rear door power

window switch

connector YB98,

terminal 12, circuit 172

(White/Black wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 67. Replace front and

rear door power

window switch,

refer to 2.20

FRONT AND

REAR DOOR

POWER

WINDOW

SWITCH in this

Section.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

67. • Back probe RHR

power window switch

connector (at RHR

door) YB37, terminal 1,

circuit 172

(White/Black wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace RHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

Repair open in

circuit 172

Recheck and

verify repair.

68. • Turn ignition ON.

• Is the green indicator

light illuminated the

LHR door power

window switch?

Replace LHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

Go to Step 69.

69. • Back probe LHR

power window switch

connector (at LHR

door) YB37, terminal 1,

circuit 172

(White/Black wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Replace LHR

power window

switch, refer to

2.21 REAR

DOOR POWER

WINDOW

SWITCHES in

this Section.

Repair open in

circuit 172.

70. • Disconnect BCM

connector YB174.

• Is power supply to

window system

interrupted (ie. green

indicator lights in

power window switch

go out)?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

short to earth in

circuit 173 and

short to B+ in

circuit 1240,

including

driver’s power

window relay.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.8 ENGINE COOLING FAN LOW SPEED CONTROL

Figure 12J-2-138

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The two, two speed electric engine cooling fans,

low speed is enabled when the low speed engine

cooling fan micro relay (located in the engine

compartment relay housing) is energised by the

BCM via a request from the Powertrain Control

Module (PCM). The PCM will request low speed

fan enable and disable via the serial data

communications - m ain bus, c ircuit 1221. T he PCM

determines when to enable the low speed fan

based on inputs form the A/C request signal,

cooling temperature sensor and vehicle speed

sensor.

When the ignition switch is turned f rom O N to OFF ,

if the FAN RUN ON bit has been set by the PCM

(coolant temperature above 117°C), the BCM will

continue to energise the low speed cooling fan

mic ro relay for f our m inutes 15 s econds ( fan r un on

time).

Figure 12J-2-139

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1. Functional check of low speed cooling fan operation.

2. Uses TECH 2 to command the BCM to turn the low speed fan on.

3. Checks for battery voltage supply to engine cooling fan motor.

4. Checks low speed fan drive signal at output of BCM when.

5. Checks circuit 473.

6. Checks circuit 1040.

7. Checks circuit 157.

8. Checks engine cooling low speed fan relay.

9. Checks circuit 533 and engine cooling fan motor.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • With the engine

coolant temperature

greater than 104°C, is

the low speed fan

enabled?

System OK. Go to Step 2.

2. • Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / LOW FAN.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2

and enable the low

speed fan.

• Is the low speed fan

enabled?

Go to PCM /

Temperature

sensor diagnosis

in Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V6 ENGINE or

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V8 ENGINE.

Go to Step 3.

3. • Back probe engine

cooling fan motor

connector YE119,

circuit 208 (Green

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 4. Check and repair

open in

circuit 208.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4. • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B7, circuit 473

(Orange/Black wire)

with a jumper lead to

earth.

• Does low speed fan

turn on?

0 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 5.

5. • Back probe engine

cooling fan low speed

relay connector

YE103, terminal 86,

circuit 473

(Orange/Black wire)

with a jumper lead to

earth.

• Does low speed fan

turn on?

0 volts Go to Step 6. Check and repair

open in

circuit 473.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. • Back probe engine

cooling fan low speed

relay connector

YE103, terminal 85,

circuit 1040

(Orange/Pink wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 7. Check and repair

open in

circuit 1040.

Recheck and

verify repair.

7. • Back probe engine

cooling fan low speed

relay connector

YE103, terminal 87,

circuit 157 (Black/Pink

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 8. Check and repair

open in

circuit 157.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • Back probe engine

cooling fan low speed

relay connector

YE103, terminal 30,

circuit 533

(Blue /Yel low wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / LOW FAN.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2

and enable the low

speed fan.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 9. Replace engine

cooling low speed

fan relay.

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • With TECH 2 still

connected, back probe

engine cooling fan

motor connector

YE119, circuit 553

(Black wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Repeat TECH 2 LOW

SPEED FAN test as

again.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace engine

cooling fan motor,

refer to either

Section 6B1

ENGINE

COOLING -

V6 ENGINE

Section 6B2

ENGINE

COOLING -

V8 ENGINE.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Repair open in

circuit 533.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair .

4.9 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF (WITHOUT TWILIGHT

SENTINEL)

Figure 12J-2-140

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The automatic light control (lights off) feature is designed to automatically switch the headlights and parking lights

off when the driver leaves the vehicle.

NOTE:

Since this system is safety related, it is mandatory that in the event of a system failure, the default status of the

BCM light control outputs are in the on state when the ignition switch is in the 'IGN' position. This will give direct

control of the lights to the headlamp switch.

The sequence of events required to switch the lights off automatically is as follows:

1. The vehicle road speed input to the BCM indicates speed is less than 10 kilometres per hour and there has not

been a sudden loss of speed (ignition being switched off with the vehicle travelling above 10 km/h).

2. The BCM senses that the ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF and remains in the off position.

3. The headlights switch has not been turned on after the ignition switch was turned off.

4. The BCM senses the driver's door has been opened or that it is already open.

When the ignition switch is turned back to 'IGN' position, the lights will turn back on to the position selected by the

headlamp switch and the mode of headlights operation (ie. high or low beam or fog light [if fitted]) determined by the

position of the relevant switches.

Turning the headlamp switch off deactivates the automatic lights system.

A delay period before the automatic lights off feature deactivates the vehicle lights can be set by following a set

procedure (refer to 1.7 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL / A UTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF (WITHOUT TWILIGHT

SENTINEL) in this Section for more information about this feature).

NOTE:

This time delay is also dependent on the priority key system. The time delay period can be set for the priority 1 and

priority 2 keys. The time delay is recalled when the unlock button on the remote is pressed and is dependent on

whether priority 1 or priority 2 key is used.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-8. Functional check of automatic light control system.

10. Functional check of fail safe.

11. Test to establish whether problem is due to no output drive from BCM or circuit problem beyond BCM.

12. Checks circuit 1150.

13. Uses TECH 2 to check for DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN signal at microprocessor of BCM.

14. Uses TECH 2 to check IGNITION signal at microprocessor of BCM.

15. Checks for correct ignition signal at input to BCM.

16. Checks DRIVER’S DOOR OPEN signal at input to BCM.

17. Checks circuit 126 and driver’s door jamb switch.

18. Checks for false output drive from BCM or short circuit in lamp circuits.

19. Uses TECH 2 to check ILLUMINATION DIM- signal at microprocessor of BCM.

20. Checks ILLUMINATION DIM- signal at input to BCM.

21. Checks circuit 717 and headlamp switch assembly.

Figure 12J-2-141

Figure 12J-2-142

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Remove and reinstall

fuse F31 (to reset the

automatic lights off

time delay period to 0

seconds).

• Turn ignition OFF.

• Turn headlamp switch

from the OFF to

PARKLAMPS position.

• Do the park lamps turn

ON?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 9.

2. • With ignition OFF, turn

headlamp switch from

the PARKLAMPS to

HEADLAMPS position.

• Do the headlamps turn

ON?

Go to Step 3. Check and repair

headlamp switch,

fault in wiring

harness to

headlamp relay s

and circuits

including fuses

and relays.

Recheck and

verify repair.

3. • Turn ignition ON.

• Close driver’s door.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the HEADLAMP

position.

• Turn ignition OFF.

• Open the driver’s door.

• Do the headlamps turn

off?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 13.

4. • From Step 3. (ignition

OFF, driver’s door

open, headlamp switch

in the HEADLAMP

position and headlights

off), turn Ignition ON.

• Do headlamps turn

back ON?

Go to Step 5. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

5. • Turn ignition from ON

to OFF.

• Open driver’s door

(headlamps OFF).

• Turn headlamp switch

from HEADLAMPS to

OFF to HEADLAMPS.

• Do headlamps turn ON

(system override)?

Go to Step 6. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the HEADLAMP

position.

• Close driver’s door.

• Hold the illumination

level switch in the down

position (DIM -).

• Turn ignition OFF.

• Open driver’s door

(initiate start of time

delay period).

• Do headlamps remain

ON (illumination level

switch held down)?

Go to Step 7. Go to Step 19.

7. • With illumination level

switch held down from

Step 6, wait the

requested time delay

and release switch.

• Do headlamps turn

OFF?

Go to Step 8. Go to instrument

illumination

diagnosis, refer to

4.15

INSTRUMENT

DIMMING

CONTROL in this

Section.

8. • Close driver’s door.

• Turn ignition ON

(headlamps On).

• Turn ignition OFF.

• Open driver’s door.

• Do headlamps turn

OFF (after time delay

period as set in Step 6

and 7)?

System OK. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Turn headlamp switch

to HEADLAMPS

position.

• Do headlamps turn

ON?

Check and verify

headlamp switch

and park

lamp circuits.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 10.

10. • Turn headlamp switch

to PARKLAMP

position.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Do headlamps turn

ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

11. • Remove BCM

connector YB175 and

back probe harness

end of connector,

terminal E28, circuit

1150 (Black wire) with

a jumper lead and

connect to a sound

earth.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARKLAMP

position.

• Do park lamps turn

ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 12.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

12. • Reconnect BCM

connector YB175.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E28, circuit

1150 (Black wire) and

headlamp switch

connector YB33, circuit

1150 (Black wire) with

an Ohmmeter.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and repair

headlamp switch

assembly, fault in

wiring harness to

head and park

lamp relays

and/or park lamps

(inc. fuses, head

and park

lamp relays).

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in

circuit 1150.

Recheck and

verify repair.

13. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DRIVERS

DOOR display.

• Open driver’s door.

• Does screen display

DRIVERS DOOR

OPEN?

Go to Step 14. Go to Step 16.

14. • With TECH 2 still

connected and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to IGNITION

SWITCH display.

• With ignition OFF, does

screen display

IGNITION SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 15. Go to Step 18.

15. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E20, circuit 39

(Pink/Black wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

0 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

fault in wiring

(particularly short

to Battery +) in

circuit 39 or faulty

ignition switch.

Recheck and

verify repair.

16. • Open driver’s door.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C8, circuit 126

(Grey/White wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

Below

0.5 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 17.

17. • Disconnect BCM

connector YB173 and

back probe harness

end of terminal C8,

circuit 126 (Grey/White

wire) and driver’s door

jamb switch connector

YB1, circuit 126

(Grey/White wire) wi th

an Ohmmeter.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace driver’s

door jamb switch,

refer to 2.10

DOOR JAMB

SWITCH in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in

circuit 126.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

18. • Disconnect BCM

connector YB175.

• Turn headlamp switch

to Headlamp position.

• Do headlamps switch

OFF?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

short to earth in

wiring to relays

and/or earth end

of headlamps,

faulty relays

(beyond BCM

terminal E28).

Recheck and

verify repair.

19. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Turn the headlamp

switch to HEADLAMP

position.

• Scroll to

ILLUMINATION

SWITCH POSITION

display.

• Activate DIM - control

on the illumination

switch.

• Does screen display

ILLUMINATION

SWITCH POSITION

down?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 20.

20. • With headlamp switch

still in HEADLAMP

position, back probe

BCM connector YB175,

terminal E11, circuit

717 (White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Hold the illumination

control switch in the

DIM - position.

• Is voltage as specified?

Approx.

1.6 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 21.

21. • Check integrity of

circuit 717 (White wire).

• Is circuit 717 OK?

Below

1 ohm Replace

headlamp switch,

refer to

Section 12B

LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

Check and repair

circuit 717 as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.10 AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL - AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON AND OFF (WITH TWILIGHT

SENTINEL)

Figure 12J-2-143

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The automatic light control, lights on and off feature with twilight sentinel, turns the vehicle headlights on and off,

depending on the outside light level. This feature will only work while the headlamp switch is in the AUTO position

and the ignition is switched ON. The lights will operate as normal in other switch positions.

The light sensor is part of the sun sensor / remote receiver module and is located in the instrument panel pad of the

vehicle between the demist ducts. The light sensor is used to monitor the amount of light in front of the vehicle. The

BCM monitors the output of this sensor via circuit 272 and determines when the light levels are low enough to turn

the lights on.

TECH 2 can be used to select several different ON/OFF light levels to suit the customer preferences. The automatic

lights off feature works as per normal (automatic lights off without twilight sentinel) during automatic light control

(including auto lights off delay period).

Diagnostic Aids

If a driver complains of the headlamps coming on to early (during daylight), or to late (well after dusk), the sensitivity

of the twilight can be programmed using TECH 2.

By adjusting the sensitivity down (below the default value of 4) the headlamps will turn on later.

By adjusting the sensitivity up (above the default value of 4) the headlamps will turn on earlier.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-3. Functional check of automatic light control system.

5. Uses TECH 2 to operate headlights in the AUTO position to establish whether problem is with input or output of

BCM.

6. Checks for power and earth to sun sensor / remote receiver module.

7. Uses TECH 2 to check LIGHT SENSOR LEVEL signal at microprocessor of BCM.

8. Checks for BCM output drive of AUTO LIGHTS ON.

9. Checks circuit 308.

10. Checks for battery voltage supply at sun sensor/remote receiver module (circuit 740).

11. Checks circuit 271.

12. Checks LIGHT SENSOR LEVEL signal at input to BCM.

13. Checks circuit 272.

14. Uses TECH 2 to turn headlights off in the AUTO position to establish whether problem is with output or input of

BCM.

15. Checks LIGHT SENSOR LEVEL signal at input to BCM.

16. Tests for false output drive from BCM or short circuit in wiring.

Figure 12J-2-144

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to AUTO position.

• Cover the sun

sensor/remote receiver

module assembly.

• Do the headlamps turn

ON?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 4.

2. • With ignition still ON

and headlamp switch

in AUTO position,

uncover the sun

sensor/remote receiver

module.

• Shine a torch on the

sun sensor/remote

receiver module.

• Do the headlamps

switch OFF?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 14.

3. • Does the automatic

lights off feature

(including delay time)

operate with the light

switch in the AUTO

position when the

ignition is switched off

and the driver’s door is

open?

System OK. Go to automatic

lights off

diagnosis, refer to

4.9 AUTOMATIC

LIGHT CONTROL

- AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS OFF

(WITHOUT

TWILIGHT

SENTINEL) in this

Section.

4. • Do lights operate

normally in the PARK

and HEADLAMP

positions?

Go to Step 5. Go to automatic

lights off

diagnosis, refer to

4.9 AUTOMATIC

LIGHT CONTROL

- AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS OFF

(WITHOUT

TWILIGHT

SENTINEL) in this

Section.

5. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / LAMPS /

TWILIGHT SENTINEL.

• Turn headlamp switch

to AUTO position.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Do headlamps turn

ON?

Go to Step 6. Go to Step 8.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. • Check operation of the

remote coded key

receiver by locking and

unlocking doors using

remote coded key

LOCK and UNLOCK

button.

• Does remote coded

key receiver operate?

Go to Step 7. Go to Step 10.

7. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to AMBIENT

LIGHT SENSOR

display.

• Cover the sun

sensor/remote receiver

module assembly.

• Does screen display

AMBIENT LIGHT

SENSOR 0V?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 12.

8. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E12, circuit

308 (White/Red wire)

with a jumper lead to

earth.

• Turn headlamp switch

to AUTO position.

• Do lights come on?

0 volt Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

9. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E12, circuit

308 (White/Red wire)

light switch connector

YB33, circuit 308,

(White/Red wire) with

an Ohmmeter and

check for continuity.

• Does continuity exist?

Replace light

switch, refer to

Section 12B

LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

Check and repair

open in

circuit 308.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • Back probe sun

sensor/remote receiver

module connector

YB95, circuit 740

(Orange/Black wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 11. Check and repair

open in

circuit 740.

Recheck and

verify repair.

11. • Check integrity of

circuit 271

(Brown/Green wire).

• Is circuit 271 OK?

Go to Step 7. Check and repair

circuit 271 as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

12. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E10, circuit

272 (Yellow/Black

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Cover the sun

sensor/remote receiver

module assembly.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Less

than

0.5 volts

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 13.

13. • Check integrity of

circuit 272

(Yellow/Brown wire).

• Is circuit 272 OK?

Replace sun

sensor/ remote

receiver module,

refer to 2.12 SUN

SENSOR

/REMOTE

RECEIVER

MODULE in this

Section.

Check and repair

circuit 272 as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

14. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TEST / LAMPS /

TWILIGHT SENTINEL.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Turn light switch to

AUTO position.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2

and command lights

off.

• Do lights turn off when

commanded?

Go to Step 15. Go to Step 16.

15. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E10, circuit

272 (Yellow/Black

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Shine a torch on the

sun sensor/remote

module.

• Is voltage as

specified?

5 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace sun

sensor/ remote

receiver module,

refer to 2.12 SUN

SENSOR

/REMOTE

RECEIVER

MODULE in this

Section.

16. • Turn light switch to

AUTO position.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB175.

• Do headlamps turn

off?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

short as

necessary in

wiring to relays

and/or earth end

of lamps or

faulty relays

(beyond BCM

terminal E12).

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.11 ROADSPEED DEPENDENT VARIABLE DWELL WIPER SYSTEM

Figure 12J-2-145

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

This system controls the front intermittent and rear wiper function. The front wiper dwell on vehicles with high series

BCM’s is dependant on the vehicles road speed and the position of the adjustable potentiometer located on the

wiper control stalk. The faster the vehicle travels, the shorter the dwell time.

The operation of the intermittent rear wiper (Berlina Wagon) is totally independent of the operation of the front

intermittent wiper except when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is in the accessories position. In this

situation the front and rear intermittent wipers will be synchronised. Due to different wipe action between front and

rear wipers, the rear wiper will start 0.25 seconds before the front wiper.

If the option is set, the rear wiper has the added function of wiping continuously when the vehicle is in reverse gear

(communication between the PCM and BCM via the serial data bus, circuit 1221) and the rear wiper switch is turned

ON.

The front and rear wipers employ a “wipe after wash” function where, if the relevant washer pump switch has been

pressed for more than 0.5 seconds, the wipers start sweeping at a low speed continuously until the washer pump

has been disengaged. Following which, the wiper will be held on for a calculated time period so that the following

number of sweeps can be completed:

• One additional sweep if washer switch pressed for less than 1 second.

• Two additional sweeps if washer switch is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds.

• Three additional sweeps if washer switch is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds

In order to correctly perform the number of additional sweeps, the wiper motor park switch is monitored by the BCM

via circuit 196. This allows the wiper supply power to be transferred to the park switch at the optimum time.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-12. Functional check of wiper control system.

13. Uses TECH 2 to operate front wiper (establishes whether problem is with input or output of BCM).

14 Uses TECH 2 to check for INTERMITTENT WIPER/WASHER SWITCH ON signal at microprocessor of

BCM.

15. Checks for 12 volt supply to terminals 1 and 5 of intermittent relay.

16. Checks BCM output drive of intermittent wiper relay.

17. Checks circuit 90.

18. Checks intermittent wiper relay.

19. Checks for 12 volts at wiper motor when commanded by TECH 2.

20. Checks circuit 152 / wiper motor.

21. Checks circuit 95.

22. Checks circuit 91 / wiper/washer switch.

23. Checks INTERMITTENT WIPER/WASHER SWITCH ON signal at input to BCM.

24. Checks circuit 97.

25. Checks circuit 41 / wiper/washer switch.

26. Uses TECH 2 to check for WIPER PARK SWITCH signal at microprocessor of BCM.

27. Checks if continuous wiper operation is due to faulty wiper/washer switch / continuous drive from intermittent

relay

28. Checks WIPER PARK SWITCH signal at input to BCM.

29. Checks circuit 41.

30. Checks circuit 196 / wiper motor assembly (internal park switch).

31. Checks for short in circuit 90, causing relay to be always driven.

32. Checks intermittent wiper relay.

33. Checks FRONT WASHER SWITCH signal at input to BCM.

34. Checks circuit 94 / wiper/washer switch.

35. Uses TECH 2 to operate rear wiper (establish whether problem is with input or output of BCM).

36. Uses TECH 2 to check REAR WIPE SWITCH ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

37. Checks for 12 volt supply to terminal 2 and 5 of rear wiper relay .

38. Checks BCM output drive of rear wiper relay at rear wiper relay.

39. Checks rear wiper relay.

40. Checks circuit 391.

41. Checks rear wiper motor, circuit 156.

42. Checks BCM output drive of rear wiper relay at BCM.

43. Checks REAR WIPER SWITCH signal to BCM.

44. Checks circuit 139 / wiper/washer switch.

45. Checks for short in circuit 492, causing relay to be always driven.

46. Checks rear wiper relay.

47. Checks REAR WASHER SWITCH signal at input to BCM.

48. Checks circuit 494 / wiper/washer switch.

49. Uses TECH 2 to check REVERSE GEAR signal at microprocessor of PCM.

50. Uses TECH 2 to check WIPER DWELL TIME signal at microprocessor of BCM.

51. Uses TECH 2 to check VEHICLE ROAD SPEED signal at microprocessor of BCM.

52. Checks WIPER DWELL SIGNAL (correct resistance) at input of BCM.

53. Checks circuit 96.

54. Checks circuit 155 and wiper dwell control switch.

55. Uses TECH 2 to check VEHICLE ROAD SPEED signal at microprocessor of PCM.

56. Uses TECH 2 to check reverse gear signal at microprocessor on the serial data bus.

Figure 12J-2-146

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Does the front wiper

sweep?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 13.

2. • Adjust the wiper dwell

control to the fastest

setting.

• Does only one wiper

sweep occur (not

continuous)?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 26.

3. • Road test vehicle with

wiper switch set to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Does wiper dwell vary

as wiper dwell control

varied and/or vehicle

speed varied as

specified?

0 km/h

min:

4 sec

max.

24 sec

greater

than 40

km/h min:

cont.

max. 10

sec

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 50.

4. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Operate the front wash

switch for 2 seconds.

• Does the front wiper

commence continuous

operation?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 33.

5. • In Step 4, did the front

wipers continue for

three additional sweeps

after the front wash

switch was released?

Sedan - System

OK.

Wagon - Go to

Step 6.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

6. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to REAR WIPE

position.

• Does the rear wiper

sweep?

Go to Step 7. Go to Step 35.

7. • In Step 6, did the rear

wiper only sweep once

(not continuous)?

Go to Step 8. Go to Step 45.

8. • While carrying out Step

6, time the period

between each sweep.

• Is the delay period as

specified?

Approx. 8

seconds Go to Step 9. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

9. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Operate the rear wash

switch for 2 seconds.

• Does the rear wiper

commence continuous

operation?

Go to Step 10. Go to Step 45.

10. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position and REAR

WIPER position.

• Vehicle speed 0 km/h.

• Are the front and rear

wipers synchronised?

Go to Step 11. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

11 • Using TECH 2, ensue

the “rear wipe

continuous operation”

option is active.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Turn the front

intermittent wipers on.

• Do the rear wipers

operate continuously

when reverse gear is

selected?

System OK. Go to Step 48.

12 • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE?

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / WIPER

TESTS / FRONT

WIPER.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Do front wipers sweep

continuously?

Go to Step 13. Go to Step14.

13 • With TECH 2 still

connected, select exit

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS and select

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to FRONT

WIPER

INTERMITTENT

SWITCH display.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Does screen display

FRONT WIPER

INTERMI TTENT ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 22.

14 • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe intermittent

wiper relay connector

YE76, terminal 5 and 1,

circuit 41 (Brown/Green

wire) with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 15. Check and repair

open in circuit 41

(including fuse

F18 and

ignition switch).

Recheck and verify

repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

15 • Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B1, circuit 90

(Brow n wire) with a

jumper lead to earth.

• Do wipers sweep?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 16.

16 • Back probe intermittent

wiper relay connector

YE76, terminal 2, circuit

90 (Brown wire) with a

jumper lead to earth.

• Do wipers sweep?

Check and repair

open in circuit 90.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 17.

17. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition On

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / WIPER

TESTS / FRONT

WIPER and conduct

test as instructed by

TECH 2.

• Back probe intermittent

wiper relay connector

YE76, terminal 3, circuit

95 (Green wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 18. Replace

intermittent

wiper relay.

Recheck and verify

repair.

18. • With TECH 2 still

connected, ignition in

the ACC position, back

probe wiper motor

connector YE93, circuit

91 (Grey / Red wi re)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Repeat TECH 2 FRONT

WIPER test as per Step

17.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 19. Go to Step 20.

19 • Back probe front wiper

motor connector YE93,

circuit 152 (Black/White

wire) with an Ohmmeter

to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace front wiper

motor assembly,

refer to 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

Check and repair

open in

circuit 152.

Recheck and verify

repair.

20. • With TECH 2 still

connected, ignition in

the ACC position, back

probe wiper/washer

switch connector YB52,

terminal 8, circuit 95

(Green wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Repeat TECH 2 FRONT

WIPER test as per Step

17.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 21. Check and repair

open in circuit 95.

Recheck and verify

repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

21. • With TECH 2 still

connected, ignition in

the ACC position, back

probe wiper/washer

switch connector YB52,

terminal 5, circuit 91

(Grey/Red wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Repeat TECH 2 FRONT

WIPER test as per Step

17.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Check and repair

open in circuit 91.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Replace

wiper/washer

switch, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

22. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E27, circuit 97

(Blue/White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 23.

23. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe

wiper/washer switch

connector YB52,

terminal 9, circuit 97

(Blue/White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Check and repair

open in circuit 97.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 24.

24. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe

wiper/washer switch

connector YB52,

terminal 4, circuit 41

(Brown/White wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Replace

wiper/washer

switch, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

Check and repair

open in circuit 41

(including

fuse F18).

Recheck and verify

repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

25. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Select BODY /BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to WIPER PARK

SWITCH display.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Does screen display

WIPER PARK SWITCH

ON when wiper is in the

park position and

WIPER PARK SWITCH

OFF when wiper is

operating?

Go to Step 26. Go to Step 27.

26. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Remove intermittent

wiper relay.

• Do wipers operate

continuously?

Replace

wiper/washer

switch, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

Go to Step 30.

27. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal B8, circuit 196

(Yellow wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Are voltages as

specified?

12 volts

while

operating

0 volts

in park

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 28.

28. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe wiper motor

connector YE93, circuit

41 (Brown/White wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 29. Check and repair

open in circuit 41.

Recheck and verify

repair.

29. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Back probe wiper motor

connector YE93, circuit

196 (Yellow w ire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Are values as specified?

12 volts

while

operating

0 volts

in park

Check and repair

open in

circuit 196,

Recheck and verify

repair.

Replace front wiper

motor, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

30. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Remove intermittent

relay.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB174.

• Back probe intermittent

wiper relay connector

YE76, circuit 90 (Brown

wire) with an Ohmmeter

to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and repair

short to earth in

circuit 90.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 31

31. • Reconnect BCM

connector YB174.

• Swap intermittent wiper

relay with a known good

relay.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn the wiper/washer

switch to

INTERMITTENT

position.

• Does only one sweep

occur?

Replace

intermittent

wiper relay.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

32. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB174,

terminal E25, circuit 94

(L Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Operate front wash

switch.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 33.

33. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe

wiper/washer switch

connector YB52,

terminal 3, circuit 94 (L

Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Operate front wash

switch.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts check and repair

open in circuit 94,

Recheck and verify

repair.

Replace

wiper/washer

switch, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

34. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / WIPER

TESTS / REAR WIPER.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Does rear wiper

operate?

Go to Step 33. Go to Step 36.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

35. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• With TECH 2 still

connected, exit

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS and select

DATA DISPLAY and

scroll to REAR WIPE

SWITCH.

• Turn wiper/washer

switch to REAR WIPE

position.

• Does screen display

REAR WIPE SWITCH

ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 42.

36. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe rear wiper

relay connector YB36,

terminals 2 and 5,

circuit 41 (Brown/Green

wire) with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 37. Check and repair

open in circuit 41.

Recheck and verify

repair.

37. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe rear wiper

relay connector YB36,

terminal 1, circuit 492

(Grey/Blue wire) with a

jumper lead to earth.

• Does rear wiper

operate?

Go to Step 41. Go to Step 38.

38. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe rear wiper

relay connector YB36,

terminal 3, circuit 391

(Green/Yellow wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Use a jumper lead and

connect the rear wiper

relay, terminal 1 to

earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 39. Replace rear

wiper relay.

Recheck and verify

repair.

39. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe rear wiper

motor connector YR21,

circuit 391

(Green/Yellow wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Use a jumper lead and

connect the rear wiper

relay, terminal 1 to

earth.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Go to Step 40. Check and repair

open in

circuit 391.

Recheck and verify

repair.

40. • Back probe rear wiper

motor earth connection

with an Ohmmeter to

earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace rear wiper

motor, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

Check and repair

rear wiper motor

earth connection.

Recheck and verify

repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

41. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB176,

terminal A8, circuit 492

(Grey/Blue wire) with a

jumper lead to earth.

• Does rear wiper

operate?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Check and repair

circuit 492.

Recheck and verify

repair.

42. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E19, circuit 139

(Grey/Red wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn wiper/washer

switch to REAR WIPE

position.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 43.

43. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe wiper

wa sher switch

connector YB52,

terminal 1, circuit 139

(Grey/Red wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn wiper/washer

switch to REAR WIPE

position.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Check and repair

open in

circuit 139.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Replace

wiper/washer

switch, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

44. • Remove rear wiper

relay.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB176.

• Back probe rear relay

connector YB36,

terminal 1, circuit 492

(Grey/Blue wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Check and repair

short to earth in

circuit 492.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 45.

45. • Reconnect BCM

connector YB176.

• Replace rear wiper relay

with a known good

relay.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Turn wiper/washer

switch to REAR WIPE

position.

• Does only one rear wipe

sweep occur (not

continuos)?

Replace rear

wiper relay.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 55.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

46. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175

terminal E15, circuit 494

(White/Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Operate rear wash

switch.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 47.

47. • Turn ignition to ACC.

• Back probe

wiper/washer switch

connector YB52,

terminal 7, circuit 494

(White/Blue wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Operate rear wash

switch.

• Is voltage as specified?

12 volts Check and repair

open in circuit 494.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Replace

wiper/washer

switch, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

48. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Vehicle in reverse gear.

• Select ENGINE /

NORMAL MODE.

• Scroll to COMMANDED

GEAR display

• Does screen display R?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to PCM

diagnostics in

Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V8 ENGINE.

49. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Vehicle stationary.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to FRONT

WIPER DWELL TIME.

• Vary wiper dwell control

switch on wiper washer

switch stalk from max.

to min. dwell time.

• Does screen display as

specified?

Min

dwell

time:

5 sec.

Max.

dwell

time:

24 sec.

Go to Step 50. Go to step 51.

50. • With TECH 2 still

connected and BCM

DATA DISPLAY

selected, scroll to

VEHICLE SPEED and

road test vehicle.

• Does TECH 2 indicate

correct road speed?

Replace BCM,

refer 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 54.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

51. • Disconnect BCM

connector YB175.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175

(harness end), terminal

E5, circuit 96 (Grey/Blue

wire) with an Ohmmeter

to earth.

• Vary wiper dwell control

switch on wiper washer

switch stalk from max.

to min. dwell time.

• Are values as specified?

Min. dwell

6.0

K/ohms

Max.

700 ohms

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 52.

52. • Back probe dwell

control switch connector

YB153, circuit 96

(Grey/Blue wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Vary wiper dwell control

switch on wiper washer

switch stalk from max.

to min. dwell time.

• Are values as specified

Min.

dwell

6.0

K/ohms

Max.

700 ohms

Check and repair

circuit 96 as

necessary.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to Step 53.

53. • Back probe dwell

control switch connector

YB153, circuit 155

(Black/Yellow wire) with

an Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace

wiper/washer

switch, refer to

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS &

HORN.

Check and repair

open in circuit 155.

recheck and verify

repair.

54. • With TECH 2 still

connected, exit BODY

selection and select

ENGINE / NORMAL

MODE and scroll to

VEHICLE SPEED.

• Roadtest vehicle again.

• Does TECH 2 indicate

correct road speed?

Replace BCM,

refer 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

Go to PCM

diagnostics in

Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V8 ENGINE.

55. • Place vehicle in neutral

gear.

• Connect TECH to DLC.

• Select ENGINE /

NORMAL MODE and

scroll to COMMANDED

GEAR.

• Does screen display

COMMANDED GEAR

Go to PCM

diagnostics in

Section 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V8 ENGINE.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and verify

repair.

4.12 SPEED SENSITIVE POWER STEERING

Figure 12J-2-147

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The control system of the BCM varies the amount of power assistance given to the steering of the vehicle in order

to allow high boost at low speed or parking and low boost at high speeds for better on centre steering performance.

The BCM contains a curve of speed versus boost (or control solenoid current) stored in memory.

The power steering boost is adjusted by accurately controlling the current flowing in the boost solenoid attached to

the steering gear valve housing.

In the event of any of the following faults, the system will default to no power steering boost: power failure, open

circuits on either side of the power steering solenoid (DTC 5), short circuit to earth on the power steering side of the

solenoid (DTC 5), and short circuit to battery voltage on the BCM side of the solenoid (DTC 6).

In the event of a short circuit to earth on the BCM side of the solenoid (DTC 5), the system will go to more than full

boost until condition stops and then will default to no boost.

If any of these faults are intermittent, cycling the ignition from OFF to ON will return the system to normal until the

fault re-occurs.

In the event of road speed information loss, the system will default to full boost.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

5. Checks circuit 139 (including fuse F15).

6. Checks power steering solenoid.

7. Checks circuit 556.

8. Checks BCM for power steering output drive.

9. Checks for serial data communications.

10. Checks for vehicle speed data at the microprocessor of BCM.

11. Checks for vehicle speed data at the microprocessor of BCM.

Figure 12J-2-148

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Start engine and allow

to idle.

• Is there any power

steering boost?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 5.

2. • Accelerating vehicle

from rest and note

power steering boost.

• Does power steering

boost reduce?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 9.

3. • Is speed sensitive

power steering

operation erratic,

requiring ignition to be

cycled from OFF to ON

to return system to

normal (DTC 5 set)?

Check for

intermittent short

to earth or open in

circuits 556 and

139 and repair as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 4.

4. • Is speed sensitive

power steering

operation erratic,

requiring ignition to be

cycled from OFF to ON

to return system to

normal (DTC 4 set)?

Check for

intermittent short

to battery voltage

in circuit 556 and

repair as

necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

System OK.

5. • Back probe power

steering solenoid

connector YE58, circuit

139 (Pink wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 6. Check and repair

fault in circuit 139

(including fuse

F15) Recheck

and verify repair.

6. • Disconnect power

steering solenoid

connector YE58.

• Back probe power

steering solenoid

connector terminals

(solenoid side) with an

Ohmmeter.

• Is reading as

specified?

7.5 to

8.5

ohms @

20°C

Go to Step 7. Replace power

steering solenoid,

refer to Section

9B SPEED

SENSITIVE

POWER

STEERING.

7. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E4, circuit 556

(Black/L Green wire)

and power steering

solenoid connector

YE58 circuit 556

(Black/L Green wire)

with an Ohmmeter.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 8. Repair open in

circuit 556.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

8. • Disconnect power

steering solenoid

connector YE58 and

using appropriate

jumper leads from KM-

609, reconnect circuit

139 and connect an

ammeter in series in

circuit 556.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / POWER

STEERING.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2.

• Does value displayed

by amp meter vary as

the level of assist is

varied?

Go to

DIAGNOSIS in

Section 9A

STEERING and

Section 9B

SPEED

SENSITIVE

POWER

STEERING.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

9. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE.

• Is the SYSTEM

IDENTIFICATION

screen display ed in the

TECH 2 display?

Go to Step 10. Go to serial data

communications

diagnosis, refer to

4.1 SERIAL DATA

COM. in this

Section.

10. • With TECH 2 still

connected and ignition

ON, exit BODY

selection and select

ENGINE / DATA

DISPLAY .

• Scroll to VEHICLE

SPEED.

• Road test vehicle.

• Does screen display

the actual vehicle

speed as the vehicle

speed varies?

Go to Step 11. Go to PCM

DIAGNOSIS in

either 6C1

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V6 ENGINE

Section 6C2

POWERTRAIN

MANAGEMENT -

V8 ENGINE.

11. • With TECH still

connected and ignition

ON, exit ENGINE

selection and select

BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to VEHICLE

SPEED.

• Road test vehicle.

• Does screen display

the actual vehicle

speed as the vehicle

speed varies?

Go to Step 8. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.13 P O WER ANTENNA CONTROL

Figure 12J-2-149

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The BCM controls the power antenna operation by providing power to the antenna motor and controlling antenna

direction, up and down.

When the radio ON signal is sensed by the BCM, the antenna mast extends to a pre-determined height, dependent

on whether priority one or priority two key was used to access the vehicle. (Two antenna height memories can be

stored by the BCM, one for each priority key, and is recalled when the UNLOCK button on the remote key is

depressed).

If at some stage the battery is disconnected, the antenna height memory setting will be lost. In this case, the

antenna default height is 6 seconds of mast upward travel.

When signals from the ANTENNA UP or ANTENNA DOWN switches are sensed, the antenna mast will move

accordingly. However, the switches do not operate when there is no signal sensed by the BCM from the radio or

when the accessories signal (ignition switch in ACC position) is not present.

When the signal from the radio is turned OFF, operation of the antenna is as follows:

1. If the ignition switch is turned to the OFF (ACC OFF) position, there is a delay of approximately 15 seconds

before the antenna mast fully retracts

2. If the ignition switch is turned to the ON (or ACC ON) position, the antenna mast will fully retract

immediately. However, a maximum delay of three seconds is acceptable.

During engine starting, the radio signal is momentarily lost and during this time, it is assumed by the BCM that the

signal is still active as it senses both IGNITION and ACCESSORIES inputs, as well as the radio signal. This

enables the antenna operation and control is unaffected during engine cranking.

Operation of the power antenna is also affected by the theft deterrent system (antenna mast retracts when system

is armed).

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

5. Uses TECH 2 to check for the accessories input at the microprocessor of the BCM when the ignition switch is

in the ACC position.

6. Uses TECH 2 to check for the radio ON signal input at the microprocessor of the BCM.

7. Checks for antenna drive signal at output of BCM, when commanded by TECH 2.

8. Checks circuit 145 (Green wire).

9. Checks for ANTENNA DIRECTION signal at output of BCM, when commanded by TECH 2.

10. Checks circuit 954 (Grey/Yellow wire).

11. Checks ACCESSORY signal at input of BCM.

12. Checks RADIO ON signal at input of BCM.

13. Checks circuit 143 (Yellow/Red wire).

14. Checks for ACCESSORY supply to radio.

15. Uses TECH 2 to check ANTENNA DOWN SWITCH input at the microprocessor of the BCM when switch is

activated.

16. Checks for ANTENNA DIRECTION signal at output of BCM, when activating the antenna down switch.

17. Checks for ANTENNA DRIVE signal at output of BCM when activating the antenna down switch.

18. Checks ANTENNA DOWN SWITCH input at input of BCM.

19. Checks circuit 160 (White wire).

20. Uses TECH 2 to check for ANTENNA UP SWITCH at the microprocessor of the BCM, when the switch is

activated.

21. Checks ANTENNA UP SWITCH input at input of BCM.

22. Checks circuit 161 (Light Blue wire).

23. Uses TECH 2 to check RADIO ON signal input at the microprocessor of the BCM.

24. Checks RADIO ON input at input of BCM.

Figure 12J-2-150

Figure 12J-2-151

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Turn ignition to ACC

and switch radio ON.

• Does antenna mast

extend automatically?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 5.

2. • Operate antenna

DOWN switch.

• Does antenna mast

retract?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 15.

3. • Operate antenna UP

switch.

• Does antenna mast

extend?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 20.

4. • Switch radio OFF.

• Does antenna retract

immediately (three

second delay is

acceptable)?

System OK. Go to Step 23.

5. • Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to ACCESSORY

SWITCH.

• Turn ignition to ACC.

• Does screen display

ACCESSORY

SWITCH ON?

Go to Step 6. Go to Step 11.

6. • With TECH 2 still

connected and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to RADIO

STATUS.

• Turn ignition to ACC

and radio ON.

• Does screen display

RADIO STATUS ON?

Go to Step 7. Go to Step 12.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

7. • With TECH 2 still

connected, exit DATA

DISPLAY and select

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / ANTENNA.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C4, circuit 145

(Green wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition to ACC

and switch radio ON.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2

and extend the

antenna mast.

• Is the voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 8. Check fuse F20, if

it is OK, replace

BCM, refer to 2.2

HIGH SERIES

BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

8. • With TECH 2 still

connected, back probe

power antenna motor

connector, terminal R,

circuit 145 (Green

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Turn ignition to ACC

and switch radio ON.

• Repeat TECH 2

ANTENNA test and

extend antenna mast.

• Is the voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 9. Repair open in

circuit 145.

Recheck circuit

and verify repair.

9. • With TECH 2 still

connected, disconnect

BCM connector YB173

and back probe BCM

connector terminal

C17 with a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Turn ignition to ACC

and switch radio ON.

• Repeat TECH 2

ANTENNA test and

extend antenna mast.

• Is the voltage as

specified?

Approx.

10 volts Go to Step 10. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10 • Check integrity of

circuit 954 (Grey wire).

• Is circuit 954 OK?

Replace antenna

motor, refer.

Section 12D

AUDIO SYSTEM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair circuit 954

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

11. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E17, circuit 43

(Yellow wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair fault in

circuit 43

(including

fuse F16).

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

12. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E16, circuit

143 (Yellow/Red wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 13.

13. • Back probe Radio

connector YB72, circuit

143 (Yellow/Red wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Repair open in

circuit 143.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 14.

14. • Back probe radio

connector YB72, ACC

terminal with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Radio

system diagnosis

in Section 12D

AUDIO SYSTEM.

Repair fault in

circuit 4 (including

fuse F16).

Recheck and

verify repair.

15. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition to ACC

and switch radio ON.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to ANTENNA

SWITCH POSITION

and operate antenna

mast down switch.

• Does screen display

ANTENNA SWITCH

POSITION DOWN

SWITCH?

Go to Step 16. Go to Step 18.

16. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C17, circuit

954 (Grey wire) wi th a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Operate antenna mast

down switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volt Go to Step 17. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

17. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C4, circuit 145

(Green wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Operate antenna mast

down switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace antenna

motor, refer to

Section 12D

AUDIO SYSTEM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

18. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E13, circuit

160 (White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Operate antenna mast

down switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volt Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 19.

19. • Check integrity of

circuit 160 (White

wire).

• Is circuit 160 OK?

Go to Radio

system diagnosis

in Section 12D

AUDIO SYSTEM.

Repair circuit 160

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

20. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition to ACC

and turn radio ON.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to ANTENNA

SWITCH POSITION

and operate antenna

mast up switch.

• Does screen display

ANTENNA SWITCH

POSITION UP

SWITCH?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 21.

21. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E14, circuit

161 (Light Blue wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Operate antenna mast

up switch.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volt Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 22.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

22. • Check integrity of

circuit 161 (Light Blue

wire).

• Is circuit 161 OK?

0 volt Go to Radio

system diagnosis

in Section 12D

AUDIO SYSTEM.

Repair circuit 161

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

23. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition to ACC

and switch radio OFF.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to RADIO

STATUS.

• Does screen display

RADIO STATUS OFF?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 24.

24. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E16, circuit

143 (Yellow/Red wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volt Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Radio

system diagnosis

in Section 12D

AUDIO SYSTEM.

4.14 DOME LAMP DELAY CONTROL

Figure 12J-2-152

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The interior lighting is controlled by the BCM, or the dome lamp switch (incorporated in the overhead dome lamp

and switch assembly). The interior lighting is activated when any door is opened, the doors are unlocked with the

remote coded key, when the dome lamp switch is operated, or if the theft deterrent system has been activated.

The interior lighting operates continuously whilst any door is open. After all doors have been closed, the lamp will

remain activated for an additional 30 seconds.

The BCM monitors the DOORS and ON positions and controls the dome lamp accordingly.

If the interior lighting has been activated by a BCM control system action, the dome lamp switch will turn the interior

lighting off when it is switched from the DOOR to the OFF position. This means that the switch can curtail any delay

time indicated as well as switch the lighting off whilst a door is open. The exception to this is if the theft deterrent

system has been triggered. In this case, even with the switch in the OFF position, the dome lamp will flash.

The interior lighting is switched on upon central door unlocking for 30 seconds. If the ignition is turned on during this

period, the interior lighting will be switched off immediately. Interior lighting is also switched off upon central door

locking, except if the dome lamp switch is turned on or if a door remains open.

With the dome lamp switch in the ON position, and the ignition turned off, the interior lighting will switch off after two

hours.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-6. Functional check of dome lamp system.

8. Uses TECH 2 to check for DOME LAMP SWITCH DOOR signal at microprocessor of BCM.

9. Checks dome lamp globe and fuse F6.

10. Uses TECH 2 to drive dome lamp.

11. Checks dome lamp DOOR signal at input of BCM.

12. Checks dome lamp drive output from BCM with the use of TECH 2.

13. Checks circuit 174.

14. Checks circuit 1140 and dome lamp and switch assembly.

15. Checks circuit 722 and dome lamp and switch assembly.

16. Checks BCM for false output drive, circuit 174 and dome lamp and switch assembly.

17. Uses TECH 2 to check for DOME LAMP SWITCH ON signal at microprocessor of BCM in the event of a false

signal causing the dome lamp to come on.

19. Checks driver’s door jamb signal at input of BCM.

20. Checks circuit 126.

21. Checks passenger door jamb signal at input of BCM.

23. Uses TECH 2 to check for DOME LAMP SWITCH ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

24. Checks for DOME LAMP SWITCH ON signal at input to BCM.

25. Checks circuit 175 and dome lamp and switch assembly.

26. Checks ignition signal at input of BCM.

Figure 12J-2-153

Figure 12J-1-154

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• All doors locked.

• Unlock doors with

remote key.

• Does dome lamp turn

on?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 7.

2. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Dome lamp on (doors

open).

• Close doors and lock

with remote key.

• Does dome lamp turn

off immediately?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 16.

3. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Doors closed but

unlocked (dome lamp

off).

• Open driver’s door.

• Does dome lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 19.

4. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Doors closed but

unlocked (dome lamp

off).

• Open any passenger

door.

• Does dome lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 21.

5. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Doors closed (dome

lamp off).

• Turn dome lamp

switch to ON position.

• Does dome lamp turn

on?

Go to Step 6. Go to Step 23.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

6. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• With doors closed,

lock then unlock doors

with remote key.

• Within 30 seconds,

turn ignition to the ON

position.

• Does the dome lamp

turn off immediately?

System OK. Go to Step 26.

7. • Switch the dome lamp

switch to the ON

position.

• Does the dome lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 8. Go to Step 9.

8. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DOME

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

DOME SWITCH

DOOR?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

9. • Check dome lamp

globe and fuse F6.

• Is globe OK?

Go to Step 10. Replace globe

and/or fuse F6.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / LAMPS /

DOME.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2

and command dome

lamp on.

• Does the dome lamp

illuminate

Go to Step 8. Go to Step 12.

11. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C19 circuit

722 (Yellow/Blue wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 15.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

12. • Disconnect BCM

connector YB173 and

back probe terminal

C24 with an Ohmmeter

to earth.

• Repeat DOME LAMP

test (Step 10).

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 13. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

13. • Reconnect BCM

connector YB173 and

back probe terminal

C24, circuit 174

(White/Green wire)

and dome lamp and

switch assembl y

connector YB6, circuit

174 (White/Green

wire) with an

Ohmmeter.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 14. Repair open in

circuit 174.

Recheck and

verify repair.

14. • Back probe dome

lamp and switch

assembly connector

YB6, circuit 1140

(Orange/Brown wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace dome

lamp and switch

assembly, refer

12B LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

fault in

circuit 1140.

Recheck and

verify repair.

15. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Back probe dome

lamp and switch

assembly connector

YB6, circuit 722

(Yellow/Blue wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Repair open in

circuit 722.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace dome

lamp and switch

assembly, refer

12B LIGHTING

SYSTEM

Recheck and

verify repair.

16. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB173.

• Does dome lamp turn

off?

Go to Step 17. Check and repair

either short in

circuit 174 or

faulty dome lamp

and switch

assembly.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

17. • Re-connect BCM

connector YB173.

• Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DOME

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

DOME SWITCH ON?

Go to Step 18. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

18. • Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C5, circuit 175

(Violet wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Check and repair

circuit 175 for

short to B+ or

replace dome

lamp and switch

assembly, refer to

12B LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

19. • Driver’s door open.

• Dome lamp switch in

DOOR position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C8, circuit 126

(White/Blue wire) with

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Below

0.5 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 20.

20. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C8, circuit

1126 (White/Blue wire)

and driver’s door jamb

switch connector YB1,

circuit 1126

(White/Blue wire) with

an Ohmmeter.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Replace driver’s

door jamb switch,

refer to 2.10

DOOR JAMB

SWITCHES in

this Section

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair open in

circuit 1126.

Recheck and

verify repair.

21. • Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C7, circuit 125

(White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Open and close each

passenger door.

• Is voltage as specified

when opening each of

the passenger doors?

Below

0.5 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 22.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

22. • While performing test

in Step 21, was voltage

as specified at least

one of the passenger

doors?

Check and repair

either open in

relevant

passenger door

jamb circuit or

faulty door jamb

switch.

Repair open in

circuit 125.

Recheck and

verify repair.

23. • Dome lamp switch in

ON position.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to DOME

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

DOME SWITCH ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 24.

24. • Dome lamp switch in

ON position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C5, circuit 175

(Violet wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 25.

25. • Dome lamp switch in

ON position.

• Back probe dome

lamp and switch

assembly connector

YB6, circuit 175 (Violet

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Repair open in

circuit 175.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace dome

lamp and switch

assembly, refer

12B LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

Recheck and

verify repair.

26. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175

terminal E20, circuit 39

(Pink/Bl ack wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in circuit 39

(including

fuse F14).

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.15 INSTRUME NT DIMMING CONTROL

Figure 12J-2-155

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The BCM controls the illumination level of the instrument dial faces, all dash and centre console illumination and

display windows of the trip computer, Electronic Climate Control (ECC) and radio.

The illumination level is adjusted by two momentary contact switches, located in the headlamp switch assembly, for

ramping the illumination intensity up and down.

The dimmer drives to full load when both the ignition is on and the park lamps are off. This gives maximum

brightness to the trip computer, ECC and radio windows. When the park lamps are switched on, the dimmer

operates according to the level previously set (is also dependant on which remote coded key was used; priority one

or priority two).

The dimmer control inputs are resistor encoded onto the one input line (including the park lamps input). A ‘bright’

input will occur when there is 0 ohms reference to the park lamp control output (DIM + activated) and a ‘dim’ input

will occur when there is 2.7 kohms reference to the park lamp control output (DIM - activated). This line is at 5.4

kohms at rest point. The system default is full load when the line is open circuit. The default dimmer intensity is full

load, and will default to this if the battery is disconnected from the vehicle.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

6. Uses TECH 2 to check for IGNITION signal at microprocessor of BCM.

7. Checks circuit 44, including fuse F13.

8. Check illumination output drive from BCM.

9. Checks circuit 8.

10. Checks for IGNITION signal at input of BCM.

11. Checks parking lamp circuit.

12. Checks circuit 19, including fuse 11.

13. Uses TECH 2 to check for park lamp switch signal at microprocessor of BCM.

14. Uses TECH 2 to check for Dim + switch signal at microprocessor of BCM.

15. Uses TECH 2 to check for Dim - switch signal at microprocessor of BCM.

16. Uses TECH 2 to vary illumination level

17. Checks for park lamp switch signal at input to BCM.

18. Checks circuit 717.

19. Checks light switch (illumination resistors).

20. Checks for Dim + signal at input of BCM.

21. Checks for Dim - signal at input of BCM.

22. Checks for short in circuit 8 or BCM that is causing illumination level not to vary.

Figure 12J-1-156

Figure 12J-1-157

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Turn ignition ON.

• Does trip computer

illuminate?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 6.

2. • Turn ignition ON.

• Light switch in PARK

position.

• Is instrument panel

illuminated?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 11.

3. • Ignition ON.

• Light switch in PARK

position.

• Activate DIM + button

located in the light

switch assembl y.

• Does instrument panel

illumination ramp up to

full?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 13.

4. • Turn ignition ON.

• Light switch in PARK

position.

• Activate the DIM -

button located in the

light sw itch assembly.

• Does instrument panel

illumination fade until

fully off?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 13.

5. • When operating

Priority One and

Priority Two keys, is

the illumination level as

set previously?

System OK. Go to priority key

system diagnosis,

refer to 4.18

PRIORITY KEY

SYSTEM in this

Section.

6. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to IGNITION

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

IGNITION SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 7. Go to Step 10.

7. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe instrument

panel cluster

connector YB66, circuit

44 (Pink/Blue wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 8. Check and repair

fault in circuit 44

(including

fuse F13).

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

8. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB176,

terminal A2, circuit 8

(Grey wire) wi th a

jumper lead to earth.

• Does trip computer

illuminate fully?

0 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

9. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe instrument

panel cluster

connector YB66, circuit

8 (Grey wire) with a

jumper lead to earth.

• Does trip computer

illuminate fully?

0 volts Repair open in

circuit 8.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Instruments

diagnosis in

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

10. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E20, circuit 39

(Pink/Bl ack wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

fault in circuit 44

(including

fuse F13).

Recheck and

verify repair.

11. • Light switch in PARK

position.

• Back probe parking

lamp relay connector

YB192, terminal 5,

circuit 9 (Brown wire

with Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Step 12. Go to automatic

lights off

diagnosis, refer

4.9 AUTOMATIC

LIGHT CONTROL

- AUTOMATIC

LIGHTS OFF

(WITHOUT

TWILIGHT

SENTINEL) in this

Section.

12. • Light switch in PARK

position.

• Back probe instrument

panel cluster

connector YB66, circuit

19 (Brown/White wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

12 volts Go to Instrument

diagnostics in

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

Check and repair

fault in circuit 19

(including

fuse F11).

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

13. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Illumination switch

OFF (centre position).

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA LIST and scroll

to PARK LAMP

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

PARK LAMP SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 14. Go to Step 17

14. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• With TECH 2

connected, and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to

ILLUMINATION

SWITCH POSITION.

• Activate the DIM +

button.

• Does screen display

INSTRUMENT

SWITCH POSITION

UP?

Go to Step 15. Go to Step 20.

15. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• With TECH 2

connected, and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to

ILLUMINATION

SWITCH POSITION.

• Activate the DIM -

button.

• Does screen display

INSTRUMENT

SWITCH POSITION

DOWN?

0 volt Go to Step 16. Go to Step 21.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

16. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• With TECH 2

connected, exit DATA

DISPLAY and select

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / LAMPS /

ILLUMINATION.

• Conduct test and vary

illumination level

up/down.

• Does illumination level

vary?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 22.

17. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Turn illumination

switch OFF (centre

position).

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E11, circuit

717 (White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

2.6 - 3.4

volts

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 18.

18. • Check integrity of

circuit 717 (White

wire).

• Is circuit 717 OK?

Go to Step 19. Repair circuit 717

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

19. • Disconnect headlamp

switch connector YB33

and back probe switch

terminals (switch end),

circuits 49 and 717

with an Ohmmeter.

• Is value as specified?

5.4

kohms Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace light

switch assembl y,

refer to Section

12B LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

20. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E11, circuit

717 (White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Activate DIM + button.

• Is value as specified?

Less

than 0.5

volts

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace light

switch assembl y,

refer Section 12B

LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

21. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E11, circuit

717 (White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Activate DIM - button.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

1.8 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace light

switch assembl y,

refer to Section

12B LIGHTING

SYSTEM.

22. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB176.

• Does instrument

illumination go out?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

short in circuit 8

(Grey wire).

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.16 REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING SYSTEM

Figure 12J-2-158

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The BCM monitors the tail, stop and licence plate lamps for bulb failures, earth circuits, current flow, as well as the

integrity of the fuses feeding these systems.

When the ignition is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the instrument cluster module which in turn illuminates

the rear lamp failure warning light for approximately 1.5 seconds. In the event of a stop, tail or licence plate lamp

failure, the BCM will send a serial data message via the auxiliary serial data bus to the instrument cluster module

which will turn the rear lamp failure light ON.

Steady illumination of the rear lamp failure warning light with the tail/headlamps turned ON, indicates a rear tail lamp

failure is evident.

Steady illumination of the rear lamp failure warning light when the brake pedal is depressed, indicates a stop lamp

failure is evident.

The BCM monitors both the parking lamp and stop lamp fuses. If battery voltage is not present at both BCM inputs

when the ignition is turned ON, the BCM determines that either fuse has failed and will illuminate the rear lamp

warning light via the auxiliary data bus.

When the parking lamps are turned ON, the BCM checks the current flowing from the light circuits through the BCM

and if this current does not match the pre-learnt current flow (refer to 1.14 REAR LAMP FAILURE WARNING

SYSTEM - REAR LAMP FAILURE WA RNING SYSTEM BULB RELEARN PROCEDURE in this Section) the BCM

will turn the rear lamp warning light ON (via the auxiliary serial data bus).

When the brake pedal is depressed, battery voltage is applied to the ABS or ABS/ETC control module which in turn

sends a signal in the form of serial data to the BCM via the auxiliary serial data bus. This data is interpreted by the

BCM as the stop lamp switch input signal. The BCM then checks the current flowing from the rear lamp circuits

through the BCM and if this current does not match the pre-learnt current flow, it turns the rear lamp failure warning

light ON (via the auxiliary serial data bus).

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-6 Functional check of system.

7. Uses TECH 2 to check STOP LAMP FUSE signal integrity at microprocessor of BCM.

8. Checks STOP LAMP FUSE signal integrity at input to BCM.

9. Uses TECH 2 to check PARK LAMP FUSE signal integrity at microprocessor of BCM.

10. Checks PARK LAMP FUSE signal integrity at input to BCM.

11. Uses TECH 2 to check BULB LAMP FAIL signal at microprocessor of BCM.

12. Visual check of tail lamp operation determines if one or all lights are operational.

13. By performing a relearn procedure, determines if BCM is faulty.

14. Visual check of tail lamps.

15. Checks circuit 151 for open circuit.

16. Checks circuit 1251 for open circuit.

17. Uses TECH 2 to determine if fault is with the instrument cluster by checking BULB LAMP FAILURE signal at

microprocessor of BCM.

18. Uses TECH 2 to check PARK LAMPS ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

20. Checks PARK LAMPS ON signal at input to BCM.

23. Checks STOP LAMP ON signal at microprocessor of BCM.

Figure 12J-1-159

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the OFF position.

• Ensure foot is OFF

brake pedal.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 2. Go to Instruments

diagnosis in

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

2. • In Step 1, did the rear

lamp failure warning

light go out after

approximately 2

seconds?

Go to Step 3. Go to Step 7.

3. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 12. Go to Step 4.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the OFF position.

• Remove one rear tail

lamp bulb.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 17.

5. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Reinstall rear tail lamp

bulb.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the OFF position.

• Turn ignition ON and

depress brake pedal.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 21. Go to Step 6.

6. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Remove one stop lamp

bulb.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the OFF position.

• Turn ignition ON and

depress brake pedal.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp

illuminate?

System OK. Go to Step 23.

7. • Turn Ignition OFF.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the OFF position.

• Ensure foot is OFF

brake pedal.

• Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA LIST.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Scroll to STOP LAMP

FUSE.

• Does screen display

STOP LAMP FUSE

FAILED?

Go to Step 8. Go to Step 9.

8. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E18, circuit

640 (Orange/Blue wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in circuit 640

(including fuse

F5 and fusible

link FQ).

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

9. • With TECH 2 still

connected and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to PARK LAMP

FUSE.

• Does screen display

PARK LAMP FUSE

FAILED?

Go to Step 10. Go to Step 11.

10. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E24, circuit

840 (Orange/White

wire) w ith a Voltmeter

to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Approx.

12 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in circuit 840

(including

fuse F4 and

fusible link FQ).

Recheck and

verify repair.

11. • Ensure headlamp

switch is in the off

position and foot is off

the brake pedal.

• With TECH 2 still

connected and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to BULB FAILED

WARNING LAMP.

• Turn ignition OFF then

ON.

• Does screen display

BULB FAILED

WARNING LAMP ON?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Instruments

diagnosis in

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

12. • Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Check to see if all tail

lamps are illuminated.

• Are

all tail lamps

illuminated?

Go to Step 13. Go to Step 14.

13. • Conduct relearn

procedure as detailed

in 1.14 REAR LAMP

FAILURE WARNING

SYSTEM in this

Section.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp go out

after approximately 2

seconds?

Go to Step 4. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

14. • While carrying out

Step 12, did at least

one tail lamp

illuminate?

Check and repair

faulty bulb or tail

lamp circuit,

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 15.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

15. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Disconnect BCM

connector YB174 and

back probe terminal

B10 on the harness

end, circuit 151 (Black

wire) with an

Ohmmeter to earth.

• Is value as specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 16 Repair open in

circuit 151.

Recheck and

verify repair.

16. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB173,

terminal C15, circuit

1251 (Brown/White

wire) with a jumper

lead to earth.

• Turn headlamp switch

to PARK position.

• Do lamps illuminate?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair open in

circuits 1251 and

or 9 (including

park lamp relay).

Recheck and

verify repair.

17. • Turn ignition OFF.

• Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to BULB FAILED

WARNING LAMP.

• Does screen display

BULB FAILED

WARNING LAMP ON?

Go to Instruments

diagnosis in

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

Go to Step 18.

18. • With TECH 2 still

connected, DATA

DISPLAY selected,

ignition ON and

headlamp switch

turned to the PARK

position, scroll to

PARK LAMP SWITCH.

• Does screen display

PARK LAMP SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 19. Go to Step 20.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

19. • Reinstall tail lamp bulb.

• Carry out relearn

procedure as detailed

in 1.14 REAR LIGHT

FAILURE WARNING

SYSTEM in this

Section.

• Remove tail lamp bulb

again.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp

illuminate?

Go to Step 5. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

20. • Turn ignition ON.

• Turn headlamp switch

to the PARK position.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E11, circuit

717 (White wire) with a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

2.2 volts Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Check and repair

open in circuit 717

(including

headlamp switch).

21. • Turn ignition ON.

• Depress brake pedal

and check to see if

stop lamps illuminate.

• Are all stop lamps

illuminated?

Go to Step 22. Check and repair

faulty bulb or stop

lamp circuit,

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

22. • Carry out relearn

procedure as detailed

in 1.14 REAR LAMP

FAILURE WARNING

SYSTEM in this

Section.

• Turn ignition ON and

depress brake pedal.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp go out

after approximately 2

seconds?

Go to Step 6. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

23. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to STOP LAMP

SWITCH and depress

brake pedal.

• Does screen display

STOP LAMP SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 24. Go to ABS and

ABS/ETC

diagnosis in

Section 12L ABS

& ABS/ETC.

24. • Reinstall rear stop

lamp bulb.

• Carry out relearn

procedure as detailed

in 1.14 REAR LAMP

FAILURE WARNING

SYSTEM in this

Section.

• Remove sto p lamp

bulb again.

• Turn ignition ON and

depress brake pedal.

• Does rear light failure

warning lamp

illuminate?

System OK. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4.17 CRUISE CONTROL INTERFACE

Figure 12J-2-160

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The cruise control module is powered up by the action of the cruise control ON/OFF switch. It then activates an

input of the BCM which in turn sends a serial data message, via the auxiliary serial data line to the instrument

cluster to turn the CRUISE lamp ON. The ignition must be ON for the BCM to communicate with the instrument

cluster.

Test Description

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

5. Uses TECH 2 to command the CRUISE lamp in the instrument cluster on.

6. Checks for the ‘ignition’ signal at the input of the BCM.

7. Checks for the ‘cruise on’ signal at the input of the BCM.

8. Checks for the ‘cruise on’ signal at the output of the cruise control module.

Figure 12J-2-161

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Turn ignition ON.

• Press the cruise

control ON/OFF

switch.

• Does the cruise control

CRUISE lamp change

state?

System OK. Go to Step 2.

2. • Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE,

turn ignition ON as

instructed and press

CONFIRM.

• Does TECH 2

communicate with the

BCM, by displaying

SYSTEM

IDENTIFICATION

information?

Go to Step 3. Go to serial data

communications

diagnosis, refer to

4.1 SERIAL DATA

COM. In this

Section

3. • With TECH 2 still

connected.

• Turn ignition ON.

• Select DATA

DISPLAY.

• Scroll to IGNITION

SWITCH.

• Does screen display

IGNITION SWITCH

ON?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 6.

4. • With TECH 2 still

connected and DATA

DISPLAY selected,

scroll to CRUISE

CONTROL INPUT

SIGNAL.

• Press the cruise

control ON/OFF

button.

• Does the screen

change status from

CRUISE CONTROL

INPUT SWITCH ON to

OFF as cruise control

ON/OFF button is

pressed?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 7.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. • With TECH 2 still

connected, exit BODY

CONTROL MODULE

and select

INSTRUMENTS /

MISCELLANEOUS

TESTS / LAMPS /

CRUISE CONTROL

ON LAMP.

• Conduct test as

instructed by TECH 2

and command the

CRUISE lamp on.

• Does the CRUISE

lamp in the instrument

cluster illuminate?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Instruments

diagnosis in

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

6. • Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E20, circuit 39

(Pink/Bl ack wire) wi th

a Voltmeter to earth.

• Are voltages as

specified?

Ignition

ON,

approx.

12 volts

Ignition

OFF

0 volts

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Repair open or

short in circuit 39

(including

fuse F14).

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

7. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E26, circuit 83

(Grey wire) wi th a

Voltmeter to earth.

• Press cruise control

ON/OFF switch.

• Does the voltage

toggle from 12 volts to

0 volts to 12 volts?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 8.

8. • Turn ignition ON.

• Back probe cruise

control connector

YE56, terminal H,

circuit 83 (Grey wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Press cruise control

ON/OFF switch.

• Does the voltage

toggle from 12 volts to

0 volts to 12 volts?

Repair open or

short in circuit 83.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

Go to Cruise

control / diagnosis

in Section 12E

CRUISE

CONTROL.

4.18 PRIORITY KEY SYSTEM

Figure 12J-2-162

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

The BCM provides an additional memory for one of the remote keys (priority one). The normal priority memory

(priority two) is used for all other keys.

The BCM stores two separate sets of parameters, one for each key for the following functions:

• Time delay for automatic headlights off.

• Antenna height memory.

• Instrument dimmer level.

These memories are recalled when the unlock button on the remote coded key is pressed and all memories are

maintained on a last used basis.

The BCM also communicates to other modules (ECC instrument modules) via the auxiliary serial data bus (circuit

1220), identifying which priority key mode (priority one or two) each module should be in.

In addition, the BCM also includes a priority output line (priority one, circuit 782). The priority one output line sets the

radio’s priority mode. When the priority one output is pulled low , the radio settings are set for priority key one.

When a new remote coded key is programmed, it is assigned sole use of one of the priority one key memories. All

remaining remote keys become priority two. Old remote key s can be re-assigned as the priority one key through

TECH 2.

Pre-requisites for priority key system diagnosis

NOTE:

The following procedure must be completed prior to diagnosing the system.

1. Ensure both remote key s are present.

2. Operate unlock button on first of the remote coded keys.

3. Connect TECH 2 to the DLC

4. Insert first remote coded key into ignition switch and turn to the ON position.

5. Using TECH 2, re-program first key to PRIORITY ONE.

6. Turn ignition switch to the OFF position.

7. Set all priority system function settings for this key (ie. antenna height, radio stations, etc.).

8. Press unlock button on the second remote coded key and set all priority function settings for this key.

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-6. Functional check of priority key system.

7. Uses TECH 2 to check if BCM is communicating with the instruments to determine if fault is with instrument

cluster or if there is a serial data communication fault.

8. Checks priority one output from BCM.

9. Checks circuit 782 (Violet wire) for open circuit.

10. Uses TECH 2 to check priority state of remote keys.

Figure 12J-2-163

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Operate the UNLOCK

button on both of the

priority one and priority

two remote coded keys

alternatively.

• Check the automatic

headlight off time delay

memories as set in

pre-requisite

diagnostic test in this

Section.

• Is the automatic

headlamp off delay

memory recalled for

both keys?

Go to Step 2. Go to Step 10.

2. • Operate the UNLOCK

button on both of the

priority one and priority

two remote coded keys

alternatively.

• Check the antenna

height memory as set

in pre-requisite

diagnostic test in this

Section.

• Is the antenna height

memory recalled for

both keys?

Go to Step 3. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

3. • Operate the UNLOCK

button on both of the

priority one and priority

two remote coded keys

alternatively.

• Check the instrument

dimmer level memory

as set in pre-requisite

diagnostic test in this

Section.

• Is the instrument

dimmer level memory

recalled for both keys?

Go to Step 4. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

4. • Operate the UNLOCK

button on both of the

priority one and priority

two remote coded keys

alternatively.

• Check the trip

computer, mode and

overspeed setting

memories as set in

pre-requisite

diagnostic test in this

Section.

• Are the trip computer,

mode and overspeed

setting memories

recalled for both keys?

Go to Step 5. Go to Step 7.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

5. • Operate the UNLOCK

button on both of the

priority one and priority

two remote coded keys

alternatively.

• Check the climate

control setting memory

as set in pre-requisite

diagnostic test in this

Section.

• Is the climate control

setting memory

recalled for both keys?

Go to Step 6. Go to ECC

diagnosis, refer

Section 2C AIR

CONDITIONING.

6. • Operate the UNLOCK

button on both of the

priority one and priority

two remote coded keys

alternatively.

• Check the radio setting

memory as set in pre-

requisite diagnostic

test in this Section.

• Is the radio setting

memory recalled for

both keys?

System OK. Go to Step 8.

7. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY /

INSTRUMENTS turn

ignition ON, as

instructed and press

CONFIRM.

• Does TECH 2

communicate with the

instruments, by

displaying SYSTEM

IDENTIFICATION

information?

Go to Instruments

diagnosis in

Section 12C

INSTRUMENTS,

WIPERS /

WASHERS AND

HORNS.

Go to serial data

communication

diagnosis, refer

4.2 SERIAL DATA

COM. in this

Section.

8. • Remove BCM

connector YB174 and

back probe harness

side of terminal B3,

circuit 782 (Violet wire)

with a jumper lead to

earth.

• Turn ignition and radio

ON.

• By connecting and

disconnecting jumper

lead, do radio settings

change?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

9. • Check integrity of

circuit 782 (Violet

wire).

• Is value as specified?

Go to radio

diagnosis, refer

Section 12D

AUDIO SYSTEM.

Repair circuit 782

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • Connect TECH 2 to

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY and

scroll to KEY

PRIORITY SIGNAL.

• Operate the UNLOCK

button on both the

priority one and priority

two remote keys

alternatively.

• Does screen display

alternate between 1

and 2?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 11.

11. • In Step 10, are both

remote keys set to

priority one?

Programme new

remote coded

key.

Using TECH 2,

program one of

the remote keys

to priority one.

4.19 SRS DEPLOYMENT VEHICLE SHUTDOWN

Figure 12J-2-164

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

In the event of SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) deployment, the Sensing Diagnostic Module (SDM) sets a

flag and sends serial data via the SRS Serial Data Interface (SDI) bus to the BCM. Within the BCM, the SRS SDI

bus is linked to the auxiliary serial data interface via a wire link. The SDM advises various vehicle systems via the

auxiliary SDI bus to take appropriate shutdown action.

1. The BCM will monitor this serial data and perform the following actions once the appropriate data is identified

and the vehicle speed is zero for 10 seconds:

2. Turn the dome lamp ON continuously.

3. Unlock all doors.

4. The dome lamp will be switched OFF when the ignition switch is cycled from OFF to ON, or when the BCM is

reset (ie. via battery disconnection).

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers on the diagnostic chart below.

1. Checks the Main SDI bus communication.

2 & 3. Checks Auxiliary SDI bus communication to the SDM and instruments.

4. Checks the BCM internal link, SRS SDI bus connection to the SDI auxiliary bus.

5. Checks circuit 1220 (Green/White wire) (BCM to SDM).

NOTE:

This diagnostic chart assumes that the central door locking system and dome lamp functions (controlled by the

BCM) are operating correctly.

Figure 12J-2-165

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE.

• Turn ignition ON (as

requested by TECH 2).

• Does screen display

BCM system

identification?

Go to Step 2. Go to serial data

communications

diagnosis, refer to

4.1 SERIAL DATA

COM. In this

Section.

2. • With TECH 2 still

connected, exit BODY

CONTROL MODULE

selection.

• Select BODY / SRS.

• Turn ignition ON (as

requested by TECH 2).

• After 5 seconds, is

TECH 2 able to

communicate with the

SDM?

Go to SRS

diagnosis in

Section 12M SRS.

Go to Step 3.

3. • With TECH 2 still

connected, exit SRS

selection.

• Select BODY /

INSTRUMENTS.

• Turn ignition ON (as

requested by TECH 2).

• After 5 seconds, is

TECH 2 able to

communicate with the

instruments?

Go to Step 4. Go to serial data

communications

diagnosis, refer

4.1 SERIAL DATA

COM. In this

Section.

4. • Ignition OFF.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E9, circuit

1220 (Green/White

wire) and BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E3, circuit

1220 (Green/White

wire) with an

Ohmmeter.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to Step 5. Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

5. • Ignition OFF.

• Back probe BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E3, circuit

1220 (Green/White

wire) and SDM

connector YB190,

terminal 9, circuit 1220

(Green/White wire)

with an Ohmmeter.

• Is reading as

specified?

Below

1 ohm Go to SRS

diagnosis in

Section 12M SRS.

Repair open in

circuit 1220.

Recheck circuit to

verify repair.

4.20 REMOTE RECEIVER/KEY

Figure 12J-2-166

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

When operating the UNLOCK button on the remote coded key within 4 metres of the driver’s side B pillar for 0.25

seconds, a Radio Frequency (RF) signal is transmitted. The BCM receives this unlock request from the remote

coded key via the remote receiver, located in the instrument panel between the demist grille. The BCM then

proceeds to unlock all the doors (single stage unlock) or just the driver’s door (two stage unlock), disarm the theft

and entry deterrent systems, turn on the dome lamp, and flash the indicators twice.

When operating the LOCK button on the remote coded key within 4 meters of the driver’s door B pillar for 0.25

seconds, an RF signal is again transmitted. The RF signal (lock request) is received by the BCM via the remote

receiver. The BCM then proceeds to lock all doors, arm the theft and entry deterrent systems, turn the dome lamp

off (if illuminated), and flash the indicators once.

When operating the boot release button on the remote coded key within 2 meters of the boot for 0.5 seconds, an

RF signal is transmitted to the BCM via the remote receiver. The BCM then proceeds to activate the rear

compartment lock actuator (provided the vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h).

The remote coded key is powered by it’s own internal battery. If this battery fails, no RF signal will be transmitted

when operating the lock, unlock and boot release buttons. However, if the battery does lose power, the remote

coded key reader has the ability to power the key once it is inserted into the ignition switch key cylinder and turned

to the IGN or START positions. This will then enable theft deterrent disarming.

Techline

TEST DESCRIPTION

The numbers below refer to step numbers in the following diagnostic chart.

1-7. Functional check to determine if system is functioning correctly or if faulty, determines if fault is with remote

receiver/key, central locking system or theft deterrent system.

8. Uses TECH 2 to check remote key signal - establish whether problem is with BCM or if further diagnosis is

required.

9. Uses TECH 2 to check for a remote key signal from a fully functional VT Series vehicle to establish whether

problem is with remote key or if further diagnosis is required.

10. Checks for power supply to remote receiver.

11. Checks circuit 271.

12. Checks circuit 266.

13. Checks if problem is due to faulty BCM or remote receiver by swapping remote receiver with a fully functional

unit.

Figure 12J-2-167

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

1. • Close and lock all

doors.

• Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder.

• Operate unlock / lock.

• Do all doors unlock

and lock?

Go to Step 2. Go to central door

locking diagnosis,

refer 4.3

CENTRAL DOOR

LOCKING in this

Section.

2. • Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and unlock

door.

• With theft deterrent

LED flashing, insert

ignition key into ignition

switch and turn key to

the ON position.

• Does the theft

deterrent LED turn off?

Go to Step 3. Go to theft

deterrent

diagnosis, refer

4.5 THEFT

DETERRENT in

this Section.

3. • Insert ignition key into

driver’s door lock

cylinder and lock all

doors.

• Operate the UNLOCK

button on the remote

coded key within 2

metres of the driver’s

door B pillar.

• Does the driver’s door

only (two stage unlock)

or all doors (single

stage unlock) unlock?

Go to Step 4. Go to Step 8.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

4. • When performing Step

3, did all of the

following occur when

the UNLOCK button on

the remote coded key

was pressed?

• Indicators flash twice

• Dome lamp illuminate

(dome lamp switch in

doors position)

• Theft deterrent LED go

out

Go to Step 5. Go to theft

deterrent

diagnosis, refer to

4.5 THEFT

DETERRENT in

this Section.

5. • Close all doors.

• Operate LOCK button

on remote coded key

within 2 metres of

driver’s door B pillar.

• Do all doors lock?

Go to Step 6. Go to Step 8.

6. • When performing Step

5, did all of the

following occur when

the LOCK button on

the remote coded key

was pressed?

• Theft deterrent LED

began flashing

• Indicators flashed once

• Dome lamp went out (if

illuminated & with

switch in the doors

position).

Go to Step 7. Go to theft

deterrent

diagnosis, refer to

4.5 THEFT

DETERRENT in

this Section.

7. • Press the boot release

button on the remote

coded key (within 2

metres of the rear of

the vehicle) for 2

seconds.

• Does rear

compartment lid lock

actuator solenoid

activate?

System OK. Go to Step 8.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

8. • Connect TECH 2 to

the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to REMOTE

DOOR SIGNAL and

REMOTE BOOT

SIGNAL screen

display.

• Operate UNLOCK,

LOCK and BOOT

buttons on the remote

coded key.

• Does the screen

display change for the

remote door signal

change from OFF to

UNLOCK / LOCK to

OFF and the remote

boot signal change

from OFF to OPEN to

OFF?

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Go to Step 9.

9. • On a VT Series vehicle

with a fully functional

remote coded key and

receiver, connect

TECH 2 to the DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to REMOTE

DOOR SIGNAL and

REMOTE BOOT

SIGNAL screen

display.

• Operate UNLOCK,

LOCK and BOOT

buttons on the remote

coded key.

• Does the screen

display change for the

remote door signal

change from OFF to

UNLOCK / LOCK and

the remote boot signal

change from OFF to

INVALID to OFF?

Go to Step 10. Programme a

new remote

coded key, refer

to 2.3 REMOTE

CODED KEY in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

10. • Return to original

vehicle with suspected

faulty remote coded

key/receiver.

• Back probe remote

receiver connector

YB95, circuit 740

(Orange/Black wire)

with a Voltmeter to

earth.

• Is voltage as

specified?

Battery

+Go to Step 11. Check and repair

open or short in

circuit 740.

Recheck and

verify repair.

STEP ACTION VALUE YES NO

11. • Check integrity of

circuit 271

(Brown/Green wire)

between BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E7 and

remote receiver

connector YB95.

• Is circuit 271 OK?

Go to Step 12. Repair circuit 271

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

12. • Check integrity of

circuit 266 (Yellow

wire) between BCM

connector YB175,

terminal E8 and

remote receiver

connector YB95.

• Is circuit 266 OK?

Go to Step 13. Repair circuit 266

as necessary.

Recheck and

verify repair.

13. • Replace remote

receiver with a known

functional one and

connect TECH 2 to the

DLC.

• Select BODY / BODY

CONTROL MODULE /

DATA DISPLAY.

• Scroll to REMOTE

DOOR SIGNAL screen

display.

• Operate UNLOCK and

LOCK button on the

remote coded key.

• Does the screen

display change from

OFF to UNLOCK /

LOCK to OFF?

Replace remote

receiver, refer 2.5

REMOTE

RECEIVER

MODULE in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

Replace BCM,

refer to 2.2 HIGH

SERIES BCM in

this Section.

Recheck and

verify repair.

5. SPECIAL TOOLS

TOOL NO. REF IN TEXT TOOL DESCRIPTION COMMENTS

AU455 CONNECTOR BODY REMOVER MANDATORY TOOL USED TO

REMOVE THE DOOR WIRING

HARNESS CONNECTOR

FROM THE A AND B PILLARS

J39200 DIGITAL MULTIMETER TOOL NO. J39200

PREVIOUSLY RELEASED, OR

USE COMMERCIALLY

AVAILABLE EQUIVALENT.

MUST HAVE 10 MEG OHM

INPUT IMPEDANCE

KM-609 CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTOR KIT PREVIOUSLY RELEASED

FOR V CAR. USED IN

CONJUNCTION WITH A

MULTIMETER FOR

MEASURING VOLTAGES AND

RESISTANCES WITHOUT

DAMAGING WIRING

HARNESS CONNECTORS

TECH 2 DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL MANDATORY TOOL USED

FOR DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5. SPECIAL TOOLS

TOOL NO. REF IN TEXT TOOL DESCRIPTION COMMENTS

AU455 CONNECTOR BODY REMOVER MANDATORY TOOL USED TO

REMOVE THE DOOR WIRING

HARNESS CONNECTOR

FROM THE A AND B PILLARS

J39200 DIGITAL MULTIMETER TOOL NO. J39200

PREVIOUSLY RELEASED, OR

USE COMMERCIALLY

AVAILABLE EQUIVALENT.

MUST HAVE 10 MEG OHM

INPUT IMPEDANCE

KM-609 CONNECTOR TEST ADAPTOR KIT PREVIOUSLY RELEASED

FOR V CAR. USED IN

CONJUNCTION WITH A

MULTIMETER FOR

MEASURING VOLTAGES AND

RESISTANCES WITHOUT

DAMAGING WIRING

HARNESS CONNECTORS

TECH 2 DIAGNOSTIC SCAN TOOL MANDATORY TOOL USED

FOR DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS